Sony DVD VCR Combo 507D User Manual

HD DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER  
HDW-F500  
PARALLEL INTERFACE KIT  
BKDW-509  
HD-SD CONVERTER BOARD  
HKDV-501A  
HD LINE CONVERTER BOARD  
HKDV-502  
HD DIGITAL VIDEO CONTROLLER  
HKDV-503  
SDTI BOARD  
HKDV-506A  
HD PULL DOWN BOARD  
HKDV-507/507D  
[ English ]  
OPERATION MANUAL  
1st Edition (Revised 3)  
Serial No. 10101 and Higher  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VORSICHT  
Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines  
elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, darf  
das Gerät weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit  
ausgesetzt werden.  
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu  
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht  
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie  
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem  
Fachpersonal.  
DIESES GERÄT MUSS GEERDET  
WERDEN.  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt  
sowohl die EMV-Direktive (89/336/EEC) als auch die  
Directive Niederspannung (73/23/EEC) der EG-  
Kommission.  
Die Erfüllung dieser Direktiven bedeutet Konformität für die  
folgenden Europäischen Normen:  
• EN60065: Produktsicherheit  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Interferenz (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Empfindlichkeit  
(Immunität)  
Dieses Produkt ist für den Einsatz unter die folgende  
elektromagnetische Bedingung ausgelegt:  
E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1-1 Features ............................................................................................ 1-1  
1-1-1 Features of the HDW-F500 .................................................... 1-1  
1-1-2 Features of the Control Panel ................................................. 1-3  
1-2 Optional Accessories ....................................................................... 1-5  
Chapter 1  
Overview  
2-1 Control Panel ................................................................................... 2-1  
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel ............................................................... 2-2  
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel (Menu Operations Section) .................. 2-5  
2-1-3 Lower Control Panel (Editing Operations Section) ................ 2-7  
2-1-4 Lower Control Panel (Tape Transport Operations Section) ... 2-9  
2-1-5 Lower Control Panel (Search Operations Section)............... 2-11  
2-2 System Set-Up Panel ..................................................................... 2-13  
2-3 Connector Panel ............................................................................ 2-14  
Chapter 2  
Locations and Functions  
of Parts and Controls  
3-1 Connecting External Equipment ................................................... 3-1  
3-1-1 Making Digital Connections................................................... 3-1  
3-1-2 Making HD Analog Connections ........................................... 3-2  
3-1-3 Making NTSC/PAL Digital Connections ............................... 3-3  
3-1-4 Cascade connection ................................................................ 3-4  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System............... 3-5  
3-2-1 Reference Signals for Output Video ....................................... 3-5  
3-2-2 Reference Signals Connections .............................................. 3-6  
3-3 Handling Cassettes .......................................................................... 3-8  
3-3-1 Recommended Cassettes ........................................................ 3-8  
3-3-2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes ............................................. 3-8  
3-3-3 Preventing Accidental Erasure ............................................... 3-9  
Chapter 3  
Setting Up the VTR  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings......................................... 4-1  
4-1-1 Menu Configuration ............................................................... 4-1  
4-1-2 Changing Menu Settings ........................................................ 4-2  
4-1-3 Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus ................................... 4-3  
4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank Function ................................................. 4-4  
4-1-5 Memory Card Function .......................................................... 4-6  
4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data...................................................... 4-11  
4-1-7 Details on VTR Memory Bank and Memory Card Functions 4-12  
4-1-8 Memory Card Data Compatibility ........................................ 4-13  
4-2 HOME Menu ................................................................................. 4-14  
4-2-1 Selecting the Output Signals(PB/EE) ................................... 4-16  
4-2-2 Record Inhibit Mode (REC INH) ......................................... 4-16  
4-2-3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel  
Chapter 4  
Menu Settings  
(ASSEMBLE or INS CUE) ................................................ 4-17  
4-2-4 Preread Settings (PRE READ) ............................................. 4-17  
4-2-5 Still-Picture Output (FREEZE) ............................................ 4-17  
4-2-6 Selecting the Capstan Servo Lock Mode (CAP LOCK) ...... 4-18  
4-2-7 Setting the Preroll Time (PREROLL TIME) ....................... 4-18  
4-2-8 Selecting DMC Playback (DMC) ......................................... 4-19  
4-2-9 Recalling Edit Points (LAST EDIT) .................................... 4-19  
(Continued)  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
4-3 TC Menu ........................................................................................ 4-20  
4-3-1 Setting the Time Data (TIMER SEL/RESET/SET/HOLD) 4-21  
4-3-2 Setting the Time Code Reader (TCR SEL) .......................... 4-24  
4-3-3 Setting the Time Code Generator (TCG SOURCE/MODE) 4-25  
4-3-4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode (RUN MODE)..... 4-25  
4-3-5 Selecting the Drop Frame Mode (DF/NDF) ......................... 4-25  
4-3-6 Inserting VITC input source (VITC) .................................... 4-26  
4-3-7 Selecting CTL Display Mode (TAPE TIMER) .................... 4-26  
4-3-8 Presetting Pull Down Time Code (PDPSET MENU)  
Chapter 4  
Menu Settings  
(when HKDV-507/507D is installed) .................................. 4-26  
4-3-9 Presetting for Conversion From 24-frame Into 25-frame Time  
Code (TCCONV MENU) .................................................... 4-27  
4-3-10 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 25F Mode  
(TC CONV).......................................................................... 4-29  
4-3-11 Displaying the Pull Down Time Code  
(when HKDV-507/507D is installed) ................................ 4-29  
4-3-12 Superimposition of Character Information  
(PD CHARA/CHARA SUPER/H-POS/V-POS) ................. 4-30  
4-3-13 Setting the VITC Insertion Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)..... 4-32  
4-3-14 Presetting for Conversion From 25-frame Into 24-frame Time  
Code (TCCONV MENU) .................................................... 4-33  
4-3-15 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 24F Mode  
(TC CONV).......................................................................... 4-34  
4-4 CUE Menu ..................................................................................... 4-35  
4-4-1 Selecting a Multi-Cue Mode................................................. 4-36  
4-4-2 Registering Cue Points ......................................................... 4-36  
4-4-3 Erasing Cue Point Data......................................................... 4-38  
4-4-4 Prerolling to a Cue Point ...................................................... 4-39  
4-4-5 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point.............................. 4-40  
4-4-6 Backspace Editing ................................................................ 4-40  
4-4-7 TELE FILE Menu................................................................. 4-41  
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings) ....................................................... 4-55  
4-5-1 Selecting the Input Video Signal (VIDEO IN) ..................... 4-56  
4-5-2 Selecting the Reference Signal (SERVO REF) .................... 4-56  
4-5-3 Adjusting the Output Video Signal  
(MASTER LEVEL to FINE) ............................................... 4-56  
4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings) ....................................................... 4-59  
4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal (A-IN CH-1~CH4) .......... 4-60  
4-6-2 Setting Emphasis (EMPHASIS) ........................................... 4-60  
4-6-3 Selecting the Monitor Output Signal  
(MON-L SEL/MON-R SEL) ............................................... 4-60  
4-7 SET UP Menu ................................................................................ 4-61  
4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu............................................................... 4-63  
4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu .......................................................... 4-65  
2
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Preparing for Recording................................................................. 5-1  
5-1-1 Setting Switches and Menus ................................................... 5-1  
5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals.......................................................... 5-2  
5-1-3 Adjusting the Audio Recording Level .................................... 5-3  
5-1-4 Simultaneously Monitoring Playback of Video and Audio  
Signals Being Recorded ......................................................... 5-4  
5-1-5 Recording Analog Audio ........................................................ 5-4  
5-2 Recording ......................................................................................... 5-5  
5-3 Preparing for Playback................................................................... 5-6  
5-3-1 Setting Switches and Menus ................................................... 5-6  
5-3-2 Adjusting the Audio Playback Level ...................................... 5-6  
5-3-3 Selecting the HD-SD Conversion Mode  
Chapter 5  
Recording/Playback  
(when HKDV-501A is installed) ........................................... 5-7  
5-3-4 Selecting the Conversion Mode of the Effective Scanning Line  
Number (when HKDV-502 is installed) ................................ 5-8  
5-3-5 Improving the Vertical Resolution during Slow-Motion  
Playback (when HKDV-502 is installed)............................... 5-9  
5-4 Playback ......................................................................................... 5-11  
5-4-1 Normal-Speed Playback ....................................................... 5-11  
5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback ...................................................... 5-11  
5-4-3 Capstan Override Playback .................................................. 5-14  
5-4-4 DMC Playback ..................................................................... 5-14  
5-4-5 Playing Back Non-audio Data .............................................. 5-16  
5-4-6 Output of Pull Down Signal ................................................. 5-16  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing ................................................................. 6-1  
6-1-1 Overview of Automatic Editing ............................................. 6-1  
6-1-2 Setting Switches and Menus ................................................... 6-2  
6-1-3 Selecting the Edit Mode ......................................................... 6-3  
6-1-4 Setting Edit Points .................................................................. 6-3  
6-1-5 Editing Non-audio Data .......................................................... 6-7  
6-1-6 Confirming Edit Points ........................................................... 6-8  
6-1-7 Cuing Up and Prerolling ......................................................... 6-8  
6-1-8 Previewing .............................................................................. 6-9  
6-1-9 Modifying Edit Points .......................................................... 6-10  
6-1-10 Performing Automatic Editing ........................................... 6-12  
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing ....................................................... 6-15  
6-2-1 Performing DMC Editing ..................................................... 6-15  
6-2-2 Animation Editing ................................................................ 6-17  
6-2-3 Performing Preread Editing .................................................. 6-18  
6-3 Manual Editing .............................................................................. 6-19  
Chapter 6  
Editing  
Table of Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Maintenance .......................................................................................... A-1  
Head Cleaning ................................................................................. A-1  
Moisture Condensation ................................................................... A-1  
Specifications......................................................................................... A-2  
Operation Information Display ........................................................... A-6  
Error Messages and Warning Messages ............................................ A-8  
Error Messages ................................................................................ A-8  
Warning Messages ........................................................................ A-10  
Error Log Menu............................................................................. A-11  
Glossary ............................................................................................... A-13  
Menu List ............................................................................................ A-15  
Items Related to the Hours Meter (H01~) ..................................... A-15  
Items Related to VTR Operations (001~) ..................................... A-16  
Items Related to Operation Panels (101~) .................................... A-20  
Items Related to Remote Interface (201~) .................................... A-23  
Items Related to Editing (301~) .................................................... A-24  
Items Related to Prerolling (401~) ................................................ A-27  
Items Related to Recording Protection (501~) .............................. A-28  
Items Related to the Time Code (601~) ........................................ A-29  
Items Related to the Video Control (701~) ................................... A-34  
Items Related to the Audio Control (801~) ................................... A-39  
Items Related to Digital Processing (901~) .................................. A-42  
Items Related to the Pull Down Control (A01~)........................... A-44  
Other Items (T01~)........................................................................ A-46  
Index ........................................................................................................ I-1  
Table of Functions (Factory Default Settings) ......................... Last page  
Appendix  
4
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 Features  
Bit rate reduction encoder  
1-1-1 Features of the HDW-F500  
The component video signal data is compressed by a  
factor of about four by a process in which it is  
subjected to frame shuffling, blocking, DCT (discrete  
cosine transform), quantizing adjustment, and variable  
length word encoding. This is the core of the newly  
developed coefficient recording system.  
The HDW-F500 is a HD digital videocassette recorder  
using the HDCAM1) format. Comparable to a  
conventional digital Betacam in size, weight, and ease-  
of-use, the HDW-F500 is a small, lightweight HD  
digital VTR using integrated circuit technology.  
ECC encoder  
The outer ECC (Error Correction Code) is added to the  
compressed video and audio data, followed by the  
inner ECC, ID data, and sync data. The Reed-  
Solomon code is employed in this error correction  
system.  
HDCAM Format  
The HDCAM format was developed from the digital  
Betacam format, and retains the same ease of use of  
digital Betacam, while yielding high performance HD  
digital recording and playback. The HDCAM format  
uses the following technologies:  
• Pre-filtering and a new coefficient recording system,  
compressing the data by a factor of seven.  
• Powerful error-correcting codes  
• High-performance, high-accuracy heads and drum  
with dynamic tracking (DT)™, together with a new  
auto-tracking technique, yielding highly reliable  
narrow track recording and playback.  
Together, these technologies allow 120 minutes of  
recording on a (large size) 1/2-inch HDCAM cassette,  
the same size as a conventional digital Betacam  
cassette.  
Channel coding  
Video and audio data with the ECC added is recorded  
in the form of serial data. The HDCAM format adopts  
a scrambled NRZI channel coding system for off-track  
and noise characteristics.  
Playback signal processing  
The playback digital data is equalized by equalizer  
circuits and error-corrected by powerful inner and  
outer ECC, which can correct most data disturbed by  
noise and dropouts in the reproduced signal. Data that  
cannot be completely corrected in this way is passed  
through a bit reduction decoder and corrected by an  
error concealment circuit.  
Digital Signal Processing  
In an HDCAM VTR, the signal processing takes a  
4:2:2 component signal which has been quantized  
according to ITU-R709/SMPTE 274M/SMPTE  
260M(BTA S-002B) standards, and subjects it to pre-  
filter, and then further applies data compression by  
using a coefficient recording system. Audio signals  
are processed using full bit processing based on the  
AES/EBU format.  
Output interface  
Component video data are converted into serial data  
and multiplexed with audio data and time code, then  
output in the HD SDI format.  
By installing an HD-SD Converter Board (HKDV-  
501A; optional accessory), D1 SDI or D2 SDI and  
analog composite outputs are also available.  
Audio output can be data from the AES/EBU digital  
interface or analog audio converted from digital  
signals.  
Input interface  
The input interface is based on the SMPTE 291M/  
292M/299M(BTA S-004B/-005B/-006B) /ARIB STD  
B-4 HD component SDI(Serial Digital Interface)  
format, allowing a single BNC coaxial cable to carry  
one component video signal, four digital audio  
channels, and time code in time division multiplex;  
this is separated for conversion to parallel data.  
The interface can be used to record audio data from an  
AES/EBU digital interface or digitally converted  
analog signals.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) HDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 Features  
Capstan override function  
Advanced Recording and Playback  
Functions  
You can adjust the playback speed by ±15% to ensure  
synchronization between, for example, two VTRs  
playing back the same program.  
High-quality digital recording  
The HDCAM system uses a component system to  
record video signals. An AES/EBU format with a wide  
dynamic range is used for 4-channel audio recording.  
A unique and powerful error correction circuit and  
concealment circuit are used in digital signal  
processing.  
Accurate, stable video signal output is made possible  
by setting and adjusting an internal digital video  
processor.  
Independent level controls  
The recording and playback levels of each of the four  
audio channels can be adjusted independently while  
peak values on all four audio channels are monitored.  
Tele-File1) memory label system  
The HDW-F500 incorporates the Tele-File memory  
label system to allow users to write and update  
videocassette management information and cue point  
data on optional MLB-1B-100 memory labels,  
providing greater efficiency in cassette management  
and editing.  
8 kinds of record/playback modes  
As the record/playback mode, you can select from the  
following 8 modes.  
59.94i/60i/50i/23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF/30PsF  
Features for Ease of Operation  
HD pull down  
By installing an optional HD Pull Down Board  
HKDV-507/507D, the HD SDI output (to which the  
audio signal and VITC are multiplexed) of 59.94i or  
60i mode are also available when the unit is operated  
in the 23.98PsF or 24PsF mode.  
Compact, lightweight, low power consumption  
The VTR is small and light enough to be used in  
outside broadcast vans or in EFP (Electronic Field  
Production) assignments.  
Remote control operation  
Noiseless playback with DT heads  
The VTR has a serial RS-422A 9-pin connector to allow  
control of the VTR by an external control unit through  
RS-422A communications.  
The VTR also comes with 9-pin REMOTE1-IN(9P) and  
OUT(9P) connectors to support bridge connection of  
multiple HDW-F500 units or other VTRs equipped with  
9-pin remote connectors for simultaneous operation.  
Furthermore, by using the optional BKDW-509 Parallel  
(50-pin) Interface Kit, you can control the VTR from an  
external control unit with a parallel interface.  
Using the playback DT heads, you can perform  
noiseless playback at 51 speeds ranging from –1 to +2  
times normal speed, including still-picture playback.  
Video and audio confidence heads  
Video and audio (channels 1 through 4) signals can be  
recorded and simultaneously played back to check the  
recording.  
Internal time code generator and reader  
The internal time code generator allows you to record  
time code (LTC or user bits) together with video and  
audio signals. Time codes (LTC or user bits) can be  
read during playback using the time code reader.  
Digital hours meter  
Three different hour displays and one cycle count  
display are supported, showing total elapsed time since  
the VTR was turned on, total drum revolution time,  
total tape running time and total number of threadings  
and unthreadings.  
Computer servo system  
Computer-controlled servo motors provide direct drive  
for the drum, capstan, and two reels, enabling quick  
and accurate tape access.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) A contact-free system for writing, reading, and modifying  
video cassette-related information on IC memory-bearing  
labels. Tele-File is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
1-2  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-diagnosis  
PF1/PF2 (Personal Function) menus  
This function allows the VTR to perform self  
diagnostics when a malfunction occurs. An error  
message is displayed and a history of all errors that  
have occurred is recorded.  
Use these menus to register up to 40 of the most  
frequently used items from the other menus (up to ten  
items each can be registered to PF1, ALT+PF1, PF2  
and ALT+PF2). Menu items that may be registered can  
be displayed by pressing the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN)  
button in the SET UP menu.  
Easy-to-maintain plug-in boards  
The VTR uses plug-in circuit boards to simplify  
servicing and inspection.  
SET UP menu  
• The VTR BANK menu allows up to eight pages of  
menu settings to be saved.  
Mountable in standard 19-inch rack  
The unit can be mounted in an EIA-standard 19-inch  
rack.  
• Use the MEMORY CARD menu to store current  
settings of the VTR and up to 8 pages of the contents  
of the VTR memory bank to a memory card.  
• Use the scrollable PF1&2 ASSIGN menu to display  
the items that can be registered in the PF1/PF2  
menus, and to select and register the most frequently  
used menu items.  
• Use the scrollable VTR SETUP menu to display the  
items necessary for making initial settings, and to  
directly change settings without registering them with  
the function buttons for each menu.  
For rack mounting, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
1-1-2 Features of the Control  
Panel  
The BKDW-515 Control Panel provides six menu  
screens corresponding to the six operation modes to  
allow fast and easy adjustment of necessary settings, as  
well as the ability to store menu settings to a memory  
card for later recall.  
• Use the PANEL SETUP menu to set control panel  
operations, such as the keyboard sound output.  
MAINTENANCE menu  
Use this menu to access the maintenance functions.  
Menu-driven operations for a variety of  
purposes  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
Six menus are displayed on the 90 × 72 mm (3 5/8  
inches × 2 7/8 inches) screen and are set using the 10  
function keys.  
A full complement of storage/recall  
functions  
These functions allow you to use titles to store and  
recall menu settings in either the VTR’s internal  
memory banks or memory cards.  
HOME menu  
Use this menu to make the basic settings for recording,  
playback, and editing operations, and to select  
channels to be edited during insert editing.  
VTR memory banks  
These memory banks allow you to store up to eight  
pages of VTR settings in addition to the current VTR  
settings. Factory settings are also stored here,  
allowing the VTR to be reset to these values at any  
time.  
TC menu  
Use this menu to make time code settings.  
CUE menu  
Use this menu to set up to 100 cue points. In page  
mode, 10 cue points per page can be set on a total of  
10 pages. In TELE FILE menu, you can change the  
setting for the memory label system Tele-File.  
Memory cards  
Each memory card can hold the current VTR settings  
as well as up to eight pages of settings. A single  
memory card thus allows you to store and recall the  
entire contents of the VTR memory banks.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 Features  
Title function  
Display of duration between edit points  
The duration between any two of IN, OUT, AUDIO IN,  
or AUDIO OUT points can be displayed by  
simultaneously pressing two buttons corresponding to  
those edit points.  
This function allows you to add titles when storing  
data to the VTR memory bank or memory card, thus  
facilitating data retrieval and management.  
Write protect function  
Setting pages stored in VTR memory banks or  
memory cards can be write protected on an individual  
basis.  
Digital time counter  
The time counter display shows CTL and time codes  
(LTC/VITC1)), or user bits data for precise setting of edit  
points.  
A full range of editing functions  
Two HDW-F500 units can be connected allowing  
automatic or manual assembly and insertion. The  
VTR also features a full range of editing functions,  
including preview, review, preroll, and the setting or  
changing of edit points.  
Quick access to edit points  
The following methods are provided for the setting of  
edit points:  
• Multi-cuing for up to 100 edit points  
• Search dial with shuttle and jog functions  
• Direct input through numeric buttons  
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) editing  
Using the DT® (Dynamic Tracking) heads, you can  
play back a section of an edit at speeds between –1 and  
+2 times normal speed and store the speed variation in  
memory for later use in automatic editing.  
Split editing  
In insert mode, audio and video edit points can be set  
separately.  
Preread editing  
Video and audio signals that have been pre-read can be  
externally processed and simultaneously re-recorded.  
A variety of audio editing modes  
You can select cut-in editing, cross-fade editing, and  
fade in/out editing for the audio signals.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) LTC (Longitudinal Time Code)  
Time code recorded on a longitudinal track  
VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code)  
Time code recorded on a video track during  
the vertical blanking interval  
1-4  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2 Optional Accessories  
HKDV-507/507D HD Pull Down Board  
This board allows the output of 2-3 pull down HD  
signal of 59.94i or 60i mode when this unit is operated  
with the frame frequency of 23.98 or 24 Hz. The 2-3  
pull down sequence is as follows.  
The following accessories can be used with the HDW-  
F500.  
BKDW-509 Parallel (50-pin) Interface Kit  
A 50-pin parallel interfaces makes the HDW-F500  
compatible with different broadcast station systems.  
HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter Board  
Allows you to output an NTSC/PAL component or  
composite signal.  
A(f1) A(f2) B(f1) B(f2) C(f1) C(f2) D(f1) D(f2)  
A(f1) A(f2) B(f1) B(f2) B(f1) C(f2) C(f1) D(f2) D(f1) D(f2)  
HKDV-502 HD Line Converter Board  
• Allows you to convert an effective scanning line  
number from 1035 to 1080 or from 1080 to 1035.  
Note  
Note  
The 2-3 pull down sequence is guaranteed only when  
this VTR is in normal play mode.  
This function is operative only when the frame  
frequency of the VTR is set to 29.97Hz or 30Hz.  
• Allows you to smooth the picture motion and  
improve the vertical resolution during slow-motion  
playback. Note that this function does not work  
when this VTR is operated in PsF mode.  
References  
In addition to this Operation Manual, the following  
manuals are available:  
HKDV-503 HD Digital Video Controller  
This allows you to remotely control the parameters for  
video signals and image enhancement.  
• Maintenance Manual Part 1  
Provides information necessary for users to maintain  
the VTR.  
HKDV-506A SDTI Board  
This board allows the input and output of special non-  
• Maintenance Manual Part 2 (sold separately)  
Provides additional information to fully maintain the  
HDW-F500. Contains details on electrical  
degrading SDTI1) (270Mbps) signals.  
adjustments, circuit diagrams, and other items.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) SDTI (Serial Data Transport Interface)  
SDTI is defined as SMPTE-305M.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1 Control Panel  
The control panel consists of the following sections:  
Upper control panel  
Lower control panel: menu operations section,  
memory card insertion slot, editing operations  
section, tape transport operations section and search  
operations section  
Upper control panel  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
Lower control panel  
Menu operations section  
Memory card  
insertion slot  
Search operations section  
Editing operations section  
Tape transport operations section  
Control panel  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
2-1 Control Panel  
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel  
1DISPLAY FULL/FINE button  
2PHONES jack  
3POWER switch  
4PHONES level control  
5 PB level  
controls  
6REC level controls 7Audio level meters  
8MONITOR SELECT button  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
9Indicator window  
INPUT SELECT button  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons  
!™REFERENCE signal indicators  
REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator  
Upper control panel  
1 DISPLAY FULL/FINE button  
2 PHONES jack  
Changes the display range of the audio level meters.  
FULL: Display range is 60 to 0 dB (peak level = 0  
dB) or 40 to +20 dB (peak level = +20 dB).  
Use 814. LEVEL METER SCALE in the VTR  
SETUP menu to select the range.  
Connects stereo headphones with 8 impedance for  
audio monitoring during recording, playback, and  
editing. Adjust the headphone output level with the  
PHONES level control.  
FINE: Displays the audio level in 0.25 dB  
increments. The center LED lights up in each  
meter as a signal level reference. When the level  
exceeds the maximum display value, the top LED  
flashes. When the level falls below the minimum  
display value, the bottom LED flashes.  
3 POWER switch  
Turns on the power. When the power is turned on, the  
audio level meters and menu display in the lower  
control panel light up.  
2-2  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 PHONES level control  
9 Indicator window  
Adjusts the output level to the PHONES jack.  
You can enable this control to simultaneously adjust  
the output level to the MONITOR OUTPUT  
connectors on the connector panel.  
The following indicators light up to indicate the VTRs  
status.  
Indicators and corresponding VTR status  
Indicator  
Status  
CHANNEL  
CONDITION  
Indicates the playback signal condition.  
Green: Playback signal is good.  
Yellow: Playback signal is less than  
good, but still reproducible.  
For details, see Section 5-1-2, “Selecting Audio Signals” on  
page 5-2.  
Red: Playback signal is poor. Head  
cleaning or internal inspection is  
necessary if the indicator lights up  
continuously.  
5 PB (playback) level controls  
Adjust the level of the audio output for channels 1 to 4  
and the cue channel.  
Pull out the controls during playback to adjust the  
audio output for each channel. Push in again for  
factory-set levels (+4 dB output for a signal recorded  
at a reference level of 0 dB). When pushed in, the  
controls cannot adjust the audio output level.  
INTERLACE  
PsF  
Lights when the VTR is operating under  
the interlace mode(50i/59.94i/60i).  
Lights when the VTR is operating under  
the PsF mode(23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/  
29.97PsF/30PsF).  
23.98  
24  
Lights when the VTR is operating with a  
frame frequency of 23.98 Hz.  
Lights when the VTR is operating with a  
frame frequency of 24 Hz.  
6 REC (recording) level controls  
Adjust the recording level for channels 1 to 4 and the  
cue channel.  
Pull out the controls to adjust the recording level for  
each channel in E-E mode1). Push in again for the  
factory-set recording level (0 dB reference level for an  
input of +4 dB). When pushed in, the controls cannot  
adjust the recording level.  
25  
Lights when the VTR is operating with a  
frame frequency of 25 Hz.  
29.97  
30  
Lights when the VTR is operating with a  
frame frequency of 29.97 Hz.  
Lights when the VTR is operating with a  
frame frequency of 30 Hz.  
Lights when item 821.AUDIO ADVANCE  
MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to  
on.When edit preset is set to ON, the  
HDW-F500 operates internally with off”  
setting, so this indicator lights off.  
ADV. AUDIO  
7 Audio level meters  
Indicate the recording level in recording or E-E mode  
or the playback level in playback or CONFI mode.  
The display range can be changed by pressing the  
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button. The reference level is  
factory set at 20 dB, and the peak level at 0 dB.  
Formoreinformationabouttheselectionoftheframe  
frequency,refertothesuppliedMaintenanceManual.  
8 MONITOR SELECT button  
Selects the audio signal to be output at the MONITOR  
OUTPUT L/R connector(s). Press to light the button  
up, then press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR  
SELECT button(s) to specify which channel(s) are to  
be monitored at the MONITOR OUTPUT L or R  
connector. If you specify more than one channel to the  
same MONITOR OUTPUT connector, a mixed audio  
signal is output from that connector. This specification  
can also be done with setting the VTR SETUP menu  
807~808 AUDIO MONITOR L~R select .  
Fordetails,seeSection4-6-3,SelectingtheMonitor  
OutputSignal(MON-LSEL/MON-RSEL)onpage4-58.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) E-E mode  
An abbreviation for Electric-to-Electric mode. In this  
mode, video or audio input signals are passed and output  
only through the VTRs internal circuitry, and not  
through the magnetic conversion system comprising tape  
and heads.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
2-1 Control Panel  
INPUT SELECT button  
!™ REF SYNC (reference signal) indicators  
These indicate the signal selected as the reference  
signal. If there is no reference signal input to the  
selected connector, the STOP button flashes.  
EXT SD: Is lit when the video signal input to the  
REF. IN SD connector is acting as the reference  
signal.  
EXT HD: Is lit when the video signal input to the  
REF. IN HD connector is acting as the reference  
signal.  
Selects the type and channel for the audio input signal.  
Press to light the button up, then press one of the  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons to select  
the type and the channel of the audio signal.  
HD SDI (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects the input signal  
from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN  
connector.  
AES/EBU (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to  
the AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors.  
ANALOG (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to  
the AUDIO INPUT connectors.  
The INPUT SELECT button will flash if there is no  
incoming signal and HD SDI or AES/EBU is selected.  
This setting can also be done with setting the VTR  
SETUP menu 802~805 AUDIO INPUT select  
CH1~CH4.  
INPUT VIDEO: Is lit when the video signal input to  
the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN  
connector is acting as the reference signal.  
REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator  
Press these buttons to select external equipment to be  
used to remotely control the VTR.  
1(9 pin): Press to select the unit connected to the  
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT (9P) connectors. The  
button lights up.  
2(50 pin): Press to select the unit connected to the  
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector (with optional  
BKDW-509). The button lights up.  
RS-232C indicator: Lights up when the VTR is  
communicating with the external equipment  
connected to the RS-232C connector.  
Notes  
When the signal input to the SDTI (OPTION) IN  
connector is selected for the input video signal, the  
signal input to the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is  
automatically selected for the input audio signal as  
well.  
When the audio signal input to the SDTI (OPTION)  
IN connector is selected for the input audio signal,  
only the INPUT SELECT button lights.  
Note  
Fordetails,referto4-6-1SelectingtheAudioInput  
Signal” on page 4-58.  
When the VTR is being controlled by external  
equipment connected to the REMOTE1-IN (9P) or  
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector, all tape transport  
buttons and edit operation buttons are disabled, except  
the STOP and EJECT buttons. You may also specify  
the disabling or enabling of all buttons by setting  
008.LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE in the VTR  
SETUP menu.  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons  
Select the audio input signal when the INPUT  
SELECT button is lit, or the audio signal to be  
monitored when the MONITOR SELECT button is lit.  
2-4  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel (Menu Operations Section)  
1Menu display  
3MEMORY CARD indicator  
2Menu buttons  
4ACCESS button  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
5Memory card insertion slot  
6Function buttons  
7ALT button  
8MAINTENANCE switch  
9ALARM indicator  
Lower control panel (menu operations section)  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
2-1 Control Panel  
1 Menu display  
5 Memory card insertion slot  
Menus selected by pressing the menu buttons appear  
here.  
Each menu shows the functions assigned to each  
function button ([F1] to [F10]) and information  
necessary for making settings, such as time codes.  
Insert memory cards here. VTR settings can be stored  
on cards and used to configure the VTR and control  
panel at a later date, thus reducing the time required  
for set up.  
Press the button beside the insertion slot to eject the  
memory card.  
2 Menu buttons  
6 Function buttons  
Press to activate the respective menu.  
HOME button: Activates the HOME menu.  
Settings for basic or editing operations are made  
in the HOME menu.  
Activates the functions in each menu.  
7 ALT (alternative) button  
TC button: Activates the TC (time code) menu. In  
the TC menu, you can switch between LTC and  
VITC and between DF and NDF, and make  
settings for time code displays on an external  
monitor.  
CUE button: Activates the CUE menu. In the CUE  
menu, you can register 10 cue points per page for  
a total of 100 cue points.  
Press to change the functions of the current menu.  
Press again to return to the original functions.  
8 MAINTENANCE switch  
Activates the MAINTENANCE menu.  
To operate this switch, push it in using the tip of a pen  
or some other pointed object while holding down the  
SFT button.  
PF1 button: Activates the PF (Personal Function) 1  
menu. In the PF1 menu, you can register  
frequently used settings in other menus. Settings  
for video input/output signals are factory set.  
PF2 button: Activates the PF (Personal Function) 2  
menu. In the PF2 menu, you can register  
frequently used settings in other menus. Settings  
for audio input/output signals are factory set.  
SET UP button: Activates the SET UP menu. Use  
the SET UP menu to restore settings to the VTR  
memory banks or IC memory card, register  
functions to the PF1/2 menus, and set items in the  
VTR SETUP menu.  
9 ALARM indicator  
Flashes when the communication between the VTR  
and the control panel is abnormal.  
For details, see Chapter 4, “Menu Settings” on page 4-1.  
3 MEMORY CARD indicator  
Lights up when the memory card is inserted.  
The indicator will flash when the memory card is  
improperly inserted or when the memory card battery  
is dead.  
4 ACCESS button  
Press this button to directly activate the MEMORY  
CARD menu. Flashes when the control panel is  
accessing the memory card.  
Note  
Do not eject the memory card while the ACCESS  
button is flashing as this may damage the contents of  
the memory card.  
2-6  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1-3 Lower Control Panel (Editing Operations Section)  
Numeric buttons and +/buttons  
SFT button  
!™RCL button  
CLR button  
SET button  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
@™PREREAD indicator  
PLAYER/RECORDER buttons  
INPUT CHECK button  
AUTO button  
!∞AUDIO IN/OUT buttons  
IN/OUT buttons  
ENTRY button  
!•Cursor control buttons  
Lower control panel (editing operations section)  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
2-1 Control Panel  
Numeric buttons and +/– buttons  
AUTO button  
Press to input time data or edit points data at the cursor  
position in menu display. Press buttons 0 to 5 while  
holding down the SFT button to input A to F  
(hexadecimal figures) for user bits. Use the +/–  
buttons to increase or decrease settings.  
When this button is pressed, it lights up and auto edit  
mode is activated.  
INPUT CHECK button  
While you hold down this button, the input signal is  
output from the monitor output connector, so that you  
can monitor the input video and audio.  
SFT (shift) button  
Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down this button to  
input A to F (hexadecimal figures) for user bits.  
Use also in combination with other buttons to perform  
other operations.  
When the LTC/VITC time code is shown on the  
display, you can check the time code generator.  
Note  
When the optional HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter  
Board is installed in the unit and VTR SETUP menu  
item 776 DOWNCONVERTER INPUT CHECK  
ENABLE is set to enable, you can monitor  
downconverter output. When you press the INPUT  
CHECK button, the input video and audio is output  
from all HD-SD converter output connectors.  
!™ RCL (recall) button  
Press to call up a previously entered value.  
CLR (clear) button  
Press to clear input data.  
SET button  
PLAYER/RECORDER buttons  
Press to finalize data.  
Select which VTR is to be controlled by this VTRs  
control panel during editing when this VTR is used as  
a recorder and an external VTR is connected to the  
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors as a player.  
PLAYER: The tape transport buttons and editing  
operation buttons on the control panel control the  
external player VTR.  
!∞ AUDIO IN/OUT buttons  
Press to set AUDIO IN and OUT points during insert  
mode. Press either AUDIO IN or OUT button while  
holding down the ENTRY button to set an audio edit  
point.  
RECORDER: The tape transport buttons and  
editing operation buttons on the control panel  
control the recorder VTR (this VTR).  
The PLAYER/RECORDER buttons have no effect  
when using this VTR alone.  
IN/OUT buttons  
Press to set an IN or OUT point during editing. Press  
either button while holding down the ENTRY button  
to set an edit point.  
ENTRY button  
@™ PREREAD indicator  
Press to enter an edit or cue point.  
Lights up during preread mode.  
While holding down this button, press either the  
AUDIO IN or OUT button, or the IN or OUT button.  
FormoreinformationaboutPREREAD,see6-2-3  
PerformingPrereadEditingonpage6-18.  
!• Cursor control buttons  
Press to move the cursor in the menu display. Move  
the cursor as required to enter a value using the  
numeric buttons, or to change a menu setting.  
2-8  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1-4 Lower Control Panel (Tape Transport Operations Section)  
STANDBY button  
EJECT button  
@∞PREROLL button  
PREVIEW/REVIEW button  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
SERVO indicator  
@•STOP button  
PLAY button  
REC/EDIT button  
REC INHIBIT indicator  
Lower control panel (tape transport operations section)  
STANDBY button  
EJECT button  
Press this button in other than standby mode to make  
it light up and place the VTR in standby mode. The  
head drum rotates in standby mode, thereby  
shortening the time required for the tape to start.  
Press this button while in standby mode to turn the  
button off and cancel standby mode. The head drum  
stops rotating and the tape tension is released. If the  
VTR remains in standby mode for more than eight  
minutes (factory setting), standby mode is  
Press to eject the cassette. When the button is pressed,  
the tape is automatically unthreaded and the cassette is  
ejected in a few seconds. Resets the display when CTL  
codes appear in the menu display in the lower control  
panel.  
automatically canceled in order to safeguard the tape.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
2-1 Control Panel  
@∞ PREROLL button  
PLAY button  
Press to position the tape to the preroll point (a  
position factory set to five seconds before the IN  
point).  
Starts playback.  
Press this button while holding down the REC button  
to start recording.  
Press this button while holding down the IN, OUT,  
AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button to cue up the tape  
at the edit point of the respective button.  
Pressing this button during recording or manual editing  
changes the VTR to playback mode.  
REC/EDIT (recording/edit) button  
Press this button while holding down the PLAY button  
to start recording.  
Fordetailsonchangingtheprerolltime, referto4-2-7  
SettingthePrerollTime(PREROLLTIME)onpage4-18.  
If you press this button in play mode manual editing  
begins. After setting edit points, if you press this  
button while the AUTO button is lit, automatic editing  
is performed.  
PREVIEW/REVIEW button  
After edit points are set, press this button to preview,  
on the monitor connected to the recorder, the effect of  
the edit before it is performed. In this operation, the  
tape runs, but no editing is carried out.  
If you press this button after carrying out an edit, the  
results of the edit are played back on the monitor  
connected to the recorder.  
REC INHIBIT indicator  
The status of this indicator depends on the setting of  
the ALT button and [F2] (REC INH) button in the  
HOME menu and the state of the record-protect plug  
on the cassette.  
SERVO indicator  
Lights up when the drum servo and capstan servo are  
locked.  
Status of the REC INHIBIT indicator  
Setting of the ALT State of the record- REC INHIBIT  
and [F2] (REC INH) protect plug on the indicator  
buttons in the  
HOME menu  
cassette  
@• STOP button  
When you insert the cassette, the VTR automatically  
enters stop mode.  
all  
Recording disabled  
Recording allowed  
Recording disabled  
Recording allowed  
Recording disabled  
Recording allowed  
Lit/flashinga)  
Lit  
Lit/flashinga)  
The STOP button flashes when the [F2] (SERVO REF)  
button in the PF1 menu is set to input but there is no  
video input signal, when the [F2] (SERVO REF)  
button in the PF1 menu is set to ext but there is no  
external reference video signal, or when the input  
signal is out of sync with the external reference video  
signal. If you want, you can set 102. REFERENCE  
SYSTEM ALARM in the VTR SETUP menu so that  
the STOP button will not flash under the above  
conditions.  
crash REC, video/  
CTL, audio/CTL  
Unlit  
off  
Lit/flashinga)  
Unlita)  
a) Toggle between lit/flashing settings is possible using the  
104.REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING setting in the  
VTR SETUP menu.  
Recording, editing, and selection of assemble and  
insert modes are possible only when the indicator is  
off.  
2-10  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1-5 Lower Control Panel (Search Operations Section)  
#™ VAR button  
JOG button  
SHUTTLE button  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
#∞ Search dial  
Lower control panel (search operations section)  
#™ VAR button  
SHUTTLE button  
Press to select variable speed playback mode for  
noiseless playback in a maximum range of 1 to +2  
times normal playback speed, in 51 steps. Playback  
exceeding this speed range is not possible. The search  
dial clicks at the positions for still-picture and normal  
playback speed.  
Press to enter shuttle mode. In this mode, the button  
lights and playback corresponding to the angle of  
rotation of the search dial. The playback speed is  
different depending on the frame frequency of the unit.  
In this mode, the search dial clicks at the positions for  
0 (still-picture), 10 and +10 times normal playback  
speed.  
JOG button  
Frame frequency Playback speed  
Press to select jog mode. In this mode, the button  
lights up and playback at 1 to +1 or 2 to +2 times  
normal playback speed is possible (determined by the  
107. JOG DIAL RESPONSE setting in the VTR  
SETUP menu). In this mode, the search dial does not  
click.  
23.98/24 Hz  
25 Hz  
Ranging from 60 to +60  
Ranging from 58 to +58  
Ranging from 50 to +50  
29.97/30 Hz  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
2-1 Control Panel  
#∞ Search dial  
Rotate to search for edit points. Rotate the dial  
clockwise for forward playback (the z indicator lights  
up) or counterclockwise for reverse playback (the Z  
indicator lights up). The p indicator lights up while  
the VTR is in stop mode.  
Shuttle mode: The playback speed is different  
depending on the frame frequency of the unit. (See  
item SHUTTLE button.) The dial clicks at the  
positions corresponding to 0 (still-picture), 10  
and +10 times normal playback speed.  
Jog mode: The playback speed corresponds to the  
rotational speed of the dial (1 to +1 or 2 to +2  
times normal playback speed depending on the  
107.JOG DIAL RESPONSE setting in the VTR  
SETUP menu). The dial does not click.  
Variable speed playback mode: Noiseless playback  
at 1 times normal speed when the dial is rotated  
fully counterclockwise, and +2 times normal  
speed when rotated clockwise. The dial clicks at  
the positions of still-picture and normal playback  
speed.  
Capstan override mode: Rotating the dial while  
holding down the PLAY button changes the  
playback speed by up to ±15%.  
After turning the power on, always set the search dial  
at the center position (where the p indicator lights up).  
2-12  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2 System Set-Up Panel  
Lift the lower control panel up to its horizontal  
position to access the system set-up panel.  
Lower control panel  
Accessing the system set-up panel  
CONTROL PANEL  
EXT  
INT  
CONTROL PANEL switch  
Selects which control panel controls this VTR.  
INT: Control is by the control panel attached to  
this VTR.  
EXT: Control is remote, by connection to the  
CONTROL PANEL connector on the rear  
panel.  
The switch is factory-set to INT.  
System set-up panel  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
2-3 Connector Panel  
1 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE  
(SUPER) connector  
7 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)  
connectors  
2 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) SYNC connector  
8 AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)  
connectors  
3 REF. IN SD connectors and 75  
9 HD SDI INPUT connectors  
termination switch  
4 REF. IN HD connectors and 75 Ω  
HD SDI OUTPUT connectors  
termination switch  
5 BREAKER button  
SDTI (OPTION) IN connector  
6 AC IN connector and  
ground connector  
!™ SDTI (OPTION) OUT  
connector  
VIDEO CONTROL  
connector  
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/  
600termination switches  
AUDIO INPUT connectors  
RS-232C connector  
!∞ AUDIO OUTPUT connectors  
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector  
CONTROL PANEL connector  
@™ D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)  
connectors  
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors  
PULL DOWN OUT (OPTION)  
connector  
!• MONITOR OUTPUT connectors  
TIME CODE OUT connector  
@∞ TIME CODE IN connector  
Connector panel  
connectors, the type (male or female) of input/output  
connectors used overseas are opposite of those used in  
Japan. To use this unit with audio equipment outside  
of Japan, you must use male/female adapters.  
Note  
For the AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4 CUE connectors,  
AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors, as well  
as the TIME CODE IN/OUT (XLR, 3 pins)  
2-14  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE  
(SUPER) connector (BNC)  
Outputs an analog composite signal for a video  
monitor. When the ALT/[F6] (CHARA SUPER)  
setting in the TC menu is on, character signals such as  
time codes are superimposed on the output.  
7 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors (BNC)  
Inputs for digital signals in AES/EBU format for  
channels 1 to 4.  
8 AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)connectors (BNC)  
Outputs digital signals in AES/EBU format for  
channels 1 through 4.  
Note  
This connector is operative only when the optional  
HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter Board is installed.  
9 HD SDI (SDI video/audio) INPUT connectors  
(BNC)  
The left connector accepts HD SDI video/audio  
signals.  
2 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) SYNC connector  
(BNC)  
Outputs an NTSC external sync signal.  
Note  
The INPUT MONITOR connector is for use with an  
input monitor and does not follow the standards for  
output.  
Notes  
This is effective only when the optional HKDV-501A  
HD-SD Converter Board is installed.  
The phase is the same as the phase of the composite  
signal output from the COMPOSITE (SUPER) of D  
CONV. OUT (OPTION) connector. Because the  
output phase changes with the operation mode of the  
VTR, use this to synchronize with the video monitor.  
HD SDI (SDI video/audio) OUTPUT connectors  
(BNC)  
Outputs up to four (1 to 4) HD SDI video/audio signal  
lines.  
Character data such as time codes are superimposed on  
the signal from the MONITOR connector when the  
ALT/[F6] (CHARA SUPER) setting in the TC menu is  
set.  
3 REF. IN SD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω  
termination switch  
Inputs for a reference video signal (NTSC or PAL) of  
the selected field frequency. Use a video signal with  
chroma burst (VBS) or a monochrome video signal  
(VS).  
A loop-through connection is possible. Set the 75 Ω  
termination switch to OFF if you are using a loop-  
through connection and set it to ON if you are not  
using a loop-through connection.  
SDTI (OPTION) IN connector (BNC)  
Outputs a video/audio SDTI signal.  
Note  
This connector is operative only when the optional  
HKDV-506A SDTI Board is installed.  
!™ SDTI (OPTION) OUT connector (BNC)  
4 REF. IN HD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω  
termination switch  
Inputs a video/audio SDTI signal.  
Note  
Inputs for a reference video signal (HD) of the selected  
field frequency. Use a trilevel SYNC signal for the  
external synchronization. A loop-through connection  
is possible. Set the 75 termination switch to OFF if  
you are using a loop-through connection and set it to  
ON if you are not using a loop-through connection.  
This connector is operative only when the optional  
HKDV-506A SDTI Board is installed.  
5 BREAKER button  
Primary circuit breaker for the AC power circuit.  
6 AC IN connector and connector  
Connects to an AC outlet using the power cord  
supplied with the VTR.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
2-3 Connector Panel  
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600termination  
switches  
!• MONITOR OUTPUT connectors (XLR-3-31)  
Outputs signals for audio monitoring. These  
connectors output two signal lines: L and R. Select  
the signals to be output with the MONITOR SELECT  
buttons and the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
buttons on the upper control panel. A setting can be  
made so that volume can be controlled with the  
PHONES volume knob.  
The termination switches should be set for in  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connector according to the  
audio input level and input impedance.  
Use OFF for low input levels when:  
Audio input level is 60 dBu (microphone input)  
and audio input impedance is high (approximately  
20 k)  
Use OFF for high input levels when:  
Audio input level is +4 dBu (line input) and audio  
input impedance is high (approximately 20 k)  
Use ON for high input levels when:  
Audio input level is +4 dBm (line input) and audio  
input impedance is 600Ω  
For details, see Section 5-1-2, Selecting Audio Signalson  
page 5-2.  
VIDEO CONTROL (Digital Video Processor  
Control) connector (D-sub 9-pin)  
Connects to the optional HKDV-503 HD Digital Video  
Controller to enable remote control of the internal  
digital video processor. Turn off the power before  
connecting the remote controller.  
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors  
(XLR-3-32)  
Accepts up to five analog audio signal lines (channels  
1 to 4 and cue).  
RS-232C connector (RS-232C serial interface)  
(D-sub 25-pin)  
Receives or transmits RS-232C serial remote control  
signals and/or VTR status data from/to external  
equipment. When this connector is being used for  
communication, the RS-232C indicator on the upper  
control panel will be lit.  
!∞ ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT connectors  
(XLR-3-31)  
Outputs up to five analog audio signal lines (channels  
1 to 4 and cue).  
CONTROL PANEL connector (15-pin)  
Connects the control panel through the 15-pin cable  
when using the control panel is used as a remote  
controller.  
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector (D-sub 50-pin,  
with optional BKDW-509)  
Inputs an external remote control signal.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
REMOTE1-IN (9P)/OUT (9P) connectors  
(D-sub 9-pin)  
@™ D CONV. SDI (D1/D2 SDI video/audio)  
(OPTION) OUT connectors (BNC)  
Used with the included 9pin remote control cable to  
connect two HDW-F500 VTRs, or a second HD VTR  
when a BVE900/910/2000/9000/9100 series BVE  
Editing Control Unit is used for editing. Used when  
you edit using two VTRs and the BVE-900/910/2000/  
9000/9100 Editing Control Unit. The REMOTE1-IN  
and OUT connectors can be used to make a bridge  
connection.  
Outputs up to three sets of video/audio signals. When  
the ALT/[F8] (CHARA SUPER) key of the TC menu  
is set to ON, text data such as time codes are  
superimposed on the output of connector 3 (SUPER).  
Selection of D1/D2 output is made using the [F9]  
(OTHERS CHECK)/[F9] (SYSTEM)/[F3] (D-CONV  
SDI) button in the MAINTENANCE menu.  
Note  
This connector is operative only when the optional  
HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter Board is installed.  
2-16  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PULL DOWN OUT (OPTION) connectors  
(BNC)  
Outputs two sets of 2-3 pull down video/audio signals.  
When the ALT/[F5] (PD CHARA) key of the TC  
menu is set to ON, text data such as time codes are  
superimposed.  
Note  
This connector is operative only when the optional  
HKDV-507/507D HD PULL DOWN Board is  
installed.  
TIME CODE OUT connector (XLR-3-31)  
Outputs the following time codes according to the  
VTR operation mode.  
In playback mode: Playback time codes  
In recording mode: Time codes generated by the  
internal time code generator, or time codes input  
to the TIME CODE IN connector.  
To select the output signal for the TIME CODE OUT  
connector, use the 613.TC OUTPUT SIGNAL IN  
REGEN MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu.  
Setting  
Description  
off tape  
In playback mode, playback time codes are  
selected, and in recording mode, TCH time  
code signals are used.  
regene  
through  
Playback time codes are regenerated and  
output only in playback mode when the servo  
is locked. In all other cases, output is the  
same as for the off tapesetting.  
The time code signal from the TIME CODE  
IN connector is output as is. (Used during  
cascade connections.)  
(For more information about cascade  
connections, see 3-1-4 Cascade  
Connections on page 3-4.)  
@∞ TIME CODE IN connector (XLR-3-32)  
Accepts external time codes for recording to tape.  
Connect to the time code output connector of the  
external equipment.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1 Connecting External Equipment  
3-1-1 Making Digital Connections  
This example shows how to connect the HDD/HDDP-  
1000 1 inch HD Digital VTR and use it as the player  
with the HDW-F500 acting as the recorder in the  
59.94i or 60i mode.  
REMOTE (9Pin)  
HDD/HDDP-1000  
50 PIN PARALLEL  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
CH-1/2  
XLR/BNC  
Converter  
CH-3/4  
P/S Converter  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
REMOTE 1-IN (9P)  
Video monitor  
(HD serial monitor)  
Making digital connections  
Refer to the Specificationssection in the appendix (page  
A-2) for recommended XLR/BNC and P/S converters.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1 Connecting External Equipment  
3-1-2 Making HD Analog Connections  
This example shows how to connect the VTR when  
using HD analog audio and video signals in the 60i  
mode.  
HDV-10 1/2 inch VTR  
REMOTE (9P)  
or other player  
ANALOG VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
ANALOG AUDIO  
OUTPUT CH-1 to 4  
HKPF-101 A/D  
Converter  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
HKPF-102 D/A  
Converter  
ANALOG VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
REMOTE 1-IN (9P)  
Set the analog audio input level and  
impedance using the AUDIO INPUT  
LEVEL/600termination switches as  
follows:  
For line input with a 600termination:  
HIGH and ON  
For high-impedance line input: HIGH  
and OFF  
For high-impedance microphone input:  
LOW and OFF  
Video monitor (HD  
monitor)  
3-2  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1-3 Making NTSC/PAL Digital Connections  
This example shows how to connect two VTRs  
together, using an HDW-F500 as the players and a  
DVR-2100 D-1 Component Digital VTR as the  
recorder.  
HDW-F500 (Player)  
[Input]  
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)  
(D1 SDI)  
REMOTE 1-IN  
COMPOSITE  
9 pin remote cable  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
SDI INPUT  
REMOTE-1  
[output]  
Video monitor  
(NTSC/PAL monitor)  
DVR-2100 (Recorder)  
Note  
For color frame editing using the HDW-F500 as the  
player and an NTSC/PAL digital device as the  
recorder, set 005.SERVO/AV REFERENCE select in  
the VTR SETUP menu to external and set  
006.EXTERNAL REFERENCE select to extern SD.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1 Connecting External Equipment  
3-1-4 Cascade connection  
This example shows how to connect multiple HDW-F500 VTRs together for simultaneous recording.  
HDW-F500 (Player)  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
TIME CODE OUT  
HDW-F500 (Recorder)  
TIME CODE IN  
HD SDI INPUT  
Digital video  
distributor  
HKPF-103M  
TIME CODE OUT  
Video monitor(HD serial  
monitor)  
HDW-F500 (Recorder)  
HD SDI INPUT  
SIGNAL IN REGENE MODE in the VTR SETUP  
menu to through.  
Note  
On the recording VTRs, set 613.TC OUTPUT  
3-4  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo  
System  
This section describes how reference signals for the  
video output and servo system are selected.  
3-2-1 Reference Signals for Output Video  
Depending on the operating condition, VTR SETUP  
menu setting, and the input signal, the video output  
signal from the VTR can be synchronized as follows.  
Start  
What is  
the 005.SERVO/AV  
input  
ext  
REFERENCE select setting  
in the VTR SETUP  
menu?  
auto  
Is the VTR currently  
recording or is EDIT  
PRESENT on?  
Yes  
No  
What is the 006.  
EXTERNAL REFERENCE  
select setting in the VTR  
SETUP menu?  
extrn SD  
extrn HD  
Is there an input  
signal on the connector  
selected by the 701.VIDEO  
INPUT select setting  
in the VTR  
Is there a signal of the  
correct frequency on the  
REF. IN SD connector?  
Is there a signal of the  
correct frequency on the  
REF. IN HD connector?  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
SETUP?  
No  
No  
No  
Synchronization  
with the video  
signal input  
designated by the  
701.VIDEO INPUT  
select setting  
Synchronization  
Synchronization  
with the reference  
video signal input  
to the REF. IN HD  
connector  
with the video  
signal input to the  
REF. IN SD  
connector  
No external synchronization (synchronization is internal)  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System  
3-2-2 Reference Signals Connections  
Make the reference signal connections as follows,  
according to your recording or playback requirements.  
Reference signal connections  
For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator  
Reference signal  
Switcher or signal generator  
REF. IN  
HD SDI INPUT  
75termination switch: ON  
For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator  
For recording signals from a HD VTR  
Reference signal  
REF. IN  
HD SDI INPUT  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
HDW-F500 (Recorder)  
75termination switch: OFF  
HDW-F500 (Player)  
75termination switch: ON  
For recording signals from a HD VTR  
3-6  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For playback  
Reference signal  
REF. IN  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
1/2/3/MONITOR  
HD serial input monitor  
75termination switch: ON  
Note  
The following signals can be used as a reference  
signal.  
HD trilevel SYNC signal of an appropriate field  
frequency for the external synchronization  
Black burst signal of 525/59.94 Hz  
Black burst signal of 625/50 Hz  
Input the signal of the appropriate field frequency for  
your system.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3 Handling Cassettes  
3-3-1 Recommended Cassettes  
3-3-2 Inserting and Ejecting  
Cassettes  
Use 1/2 inch HDCAM cassettes.  
The maximum recording time is as shown in the  
following table.  
Always turn on the VTR before attempting to insert or  
eject cassettes.  
System  
frequency  
HDCAM  
cassette  
29.97/30 Hz  
25 Hz  
23.98/24 Hz  
Inserting a cassette  
S-size cassette  
40 minutes 48 minutes 50 minutes  
124 minutes 149 minutes 155 minutes  
L-size cassette  
1
Note  
Digital Betacam cassettes cannot be used.  
2
S-size cassette  
Storage of cassettes  
Store your cassettes at room temperature and normal  
humidity.  
L-size cassette  
Inserting a cassette  
1 Turn the POWER switch to ON.  
2 Before inserting a cassette, check the following  
points:  
There is no slack in the tape.  
An error message does not appear in the menu  
display.  
The window of the cassette is facing up.  
If there is any slack in the tape, refer to Removing  
slack in the tapeon next page.  
When inserting an S-size cassette, make sure it is  
aligned with the marks on the cassette insertion  
slot.  
The cassette is loaded automatically, and the tape is  
wound around the drum.  
3-8  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing slack in the tape  
Press one of the reels in slightly, then carefully rotate it  
in the direction of the arrow until it stops.  
3-3-3 Preventing Accidental  
Erasure  
To prevent accidental erasure of material recorded on a  
tape, push in the record-protect plug.  
L-size cassette  
S-size cassette  
Removing slack in the tape  
Preventing double cassette inserting  
When a cassette is loaded, an orange lock-out bar  
appears in the cassette insertion slot to prevent users  
from attempting to load another cassette.  
Push in the record-protect plug.  
To restore the tape for recording, return the plug to its  
original position.  
Preventing accidental erasure  
Ejecting the cassette  
When a cassette with this plug pushed in is inserted  
into the VTR, the REC INHIBIT indicator on the  
lower control panel lights up and recording will not  
start, even if you press the REC button.  
To restore the tape for recording, return the plug to its  
original position.  
Press the EJECT button.  
The tape is unthreaded and the cassette is  
automatically ejected. This operation takes a few  
seconds.  
To cancel ejecting a cassette  
Press any operation button before the cassette is  
completely ejected. The cassette is loaded again and  
the operation corresponding to the button you pressed  
starts.  
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
The operating conditions of the VTR are set using the  
menu operation section on the lower control panel.  
4-1-1 Menu Configuration  
Menu items are divided among six different menus  
(HOME, TC, CUE, PF1, PF2, SET UP).  
This VTR has two kinds of menus.  
Of these menus, the PF1/PF2 (Personal Function)  
PF1&2 ASSIGN menu  
menus can be used to register frequently used menu  
This menu contains items that can be registered to the  
items from the other menus, allowing faster setting of  
PF1/2 menus.  
VTR operating conditions. Eight VTR memory banks  
Press the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button in the SET UP  
are provided for storing up to eight sets of menu  
menu to display this menu.  
settings. The contents of the eight VTR memory  
banks can, in turn, be stored on a memory card for  
later recall.  
For details on registering items in the PF1&2 ASSIGN  
menu to the PF1/2 menus, see Section 4-1-3, Registering  
Items to the PF1/2 Menuson page 4-3.  
VTR SETUP menu  
This menu contains items that specify the initial  
operating conditions of the VTR. You can change  
these settings directly without registering the items to  
the PF1/2 menus.  
Press the [F6] (VTR SETUP) button in the SET UP  
menu to display this menu.  
For details on setting operating conditions of the VTR, see  
Section 4-7-1, VTR SETUP Menuon page 4-61.  
The menu configuration of the VTR is shown in the  
figure below,  
HOME menu  
PF1&2  
ASSIGN menu  
TC menu  
PF1 menu  
PF2 menu  
Registration  
VTR SETUP  
menu  
CUE menu  
SETUP menu  
[F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button  
[F6] (VTR SETUP) button  
Menu configuration  
All items in the HOME, TC, and CUE menus can be  
duplicated and registered to the PF1/2 menus.  
Most items in the VTR SETUP menu can be  
registered to the PF1/2 menus.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
2 Press the ALT button.  
4-1-2 Changing Menu Settings  
The second page of the HOME menu appears in  
the display.  
To activate the HOME, TC, CUE, PF1, PF2, or SET  
UP menu, press the respective menu button.  
Menu items are assigned to function buttons ([F1] to  
[F10]) in each menu. When two items are registered to  
the same function button, you can display the second  
item by pressing the ALT button.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
ÅLT+HOME  
PRE  
READ  
off  
PLÅY  
LOCK  
NDF 2FD F1  
TCR  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
FREEZE  
The example below describes the procedure for  
changing the setting specified by the ALT button and  
[F5] (CAP LOCK) button in the HOME menu.  
CÅP  
PRE-  
ROLL  
STOP  
CODE  
LÅST  
DMC  
LOCK  
EDIT  
2FD  
5sec  
off  
1
To return to the first page  
Press the ALT button again.  
3 Press the [F5] (CAP LOCK) button to change the  
capstan servo lock mode setting.  
Each time the button is pressed, the setting  
changes.  
23  
Changing menu settings  
Changing menu settings using the cursor  
control buttons  
1 Press the HOME button.  
The first page of the HOME menu appears in the  
display.  
You may also use the cursor control buttons to select  
menu items and change menu settings by moving the  
on-screen cursor.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
HOME  
PB/EE  
PB  
PLÅY  
LOCK  
For settings which cannot be made by the function  
buttons alone, the following icons appear in the  
bottom-right of the menu to indicate the use of the  
cursor control buttons:  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN 00:01:10:00  
off  
INS  
TC  
: All cursor control buttons  
: Cursor control buttons for horizontal  
direction  
off  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
: Cursor control buttons for vertical direction  
In addition to operations using the cursor control  
buttons, some menus allow you to change a value by  
using the [+]/[–] buttons.  
4-2  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1-3 Registering Items to the  
PF1/2 Menus  
PF ASSIGN  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
PF1  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
PF1  
PF ASSIGN MENU  
SETUP ITEM-755  
755:MASTER(D1)  
756:Y LEVEL(D1)  
757:B-Y LVL(D1)  
758:R-Y LVL(D1)  
759:VD OUT(D2)  
760:CHROMA(D2)  
761:HUE(D2)  
ÅLT+  
PF1  
F1KEY  
1:701  
VIDEO  
2:005  
You can register up to 40 items to the PF (Personal  
Function) 1/2 menus, including items that are  
displayed when the ALT button is pressed. The  
registration of items from different menus to the PF1/2  
menus eliminates the need for changing menus in  
order to change a given VTR operating condition.  
Current setting  
IN  
3:  
SDI  
PF2  
4:708  
5:709  
6:710  
7:711  
8:712  
9:713  
10:714  
Item currently  
registered to the  
button  
ÅLT+  
PF2  
762:SETUP(D2)  
763:SYNC(NTSC)  
764:FINE(NTSC)  
SET  
SÅVE/  
PÅSTE  
CANCEL  
BLÅNK  
EXIT  
For details on the factory-set PF1/2 menus, see Section 4-5,  
PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)on page 4-53 and 4-6,  
PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)on page 4-57.  
To unregister the selected item  
Press the [F6] (SET BLANK) button.  
5 Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the  
PF1&2 ASSIGN menu, then press the G or g  
button to move the cursor to the menu item to be  
registered to the function button.  
Registering items to the PF1/2 menus  
3 2  
4,5  
To scroll the menu faster  
Press the G or g button while holding down the  
SFT button.  
PF ASSIGN  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
PF1  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
PF1  
PF ASSIGN MENU  
SETUP ITEM-760  
755:MASTER(D1)  
756:Y LEVEL(D1)  
757:B-Y LVL(D1)  
758:R-Y LVL(D1)  
759:VD OUT(D2)  
ÅLT+  
PF1  
F1KEY  
1:701  
VIDEO  
2:005  
6 81  
IN  
3:  
SDI  
PF2  
4:708  
5:709  
Registering items to the PF1/2 menus  
6:7160 760:CHROMA(D2)  
Item to be  
registered to the  
function button  
7:711  
8:712  
761:HUE(D2)  
ÅLT+  
PF2  
762:SETUP(D2)  
763:SYNC(NTSC)  
764:FINE(NTSC)  
9:713  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
10:714  
SET  
BLÅNK  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
PÅSTE  
CANCEL  
2 Press the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button.  
The PF1&2 ASSIGN menu appears in the display.  
6 Press the [F7] (PASTE) button to register the item.  
The new item is registered to the function button.  
3 Press the [F1], [F2], [F3] or [F4] button to select the  
PF menu where you wish to register an item.  
The selected PF menu appears and the items  
currently registered to the menu appear at the left  
of the display.  
7 Repeat Steps 3 to 6 to register more items.  
To cancel the registration of all new items  
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button.  
4 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the function button where the item is to be  
registered.  
8 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button to save the  
newly registered items.  
The registration is completed and the SET UP  
menu appears in the display again.  
The selected function button is highlighted and the  
current setting is displayed.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
Storing the current VTR menu settings to  
a VTR memory bank  
4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank  
Function  
Eight VTR memory banks are provided for storing up  
to eight sets of menu settings including items  
registered to the PF1/2 menus with titles.  
The contents of all eight VTR memory banks can be  
stored on a memory card.  
CLR button  
6,7  
2
Current menu settings in the  
VTR (CURRENT SETUP).  
These settings are stored  
outside the VTR memory  
banks even when the power  
Storing/recalling  
is off.  
4 3 81 5  
Storing the current VTR menu settings to a VTR memory bank  
VTR memory banks (SETUP  
BANK1 to 8 and F). SETUP  
BANKF contains the factory-  
set menu settings. By calling  
up SETUP BANK F, you can  
restore all menu items to their  
factory settings.  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
Storing/recalling  
2 Press the [F1] (VTR BANK) button.  
The VTR BANK menu appears in the display.  
VTR BÅNK  
FOOTBALL  
CH.COND  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Memory card (SETUP  
BANK 0 to 8). The card  
Storing/recalling  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT SETUP  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BÅNK7  
1 (Preset)  
2 (Preset)  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
UNDO  
stores setting data in same  
way as the VTR memory  
banks. These contents can  
be later called up in the  
VTR.  
BASEBALL  
ç
VTR memory bank function  
EDIT  
DIREC-  
TION  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
?
For details on memory card use, refer to 4-1-5 Memory  
Card Functionon page 4-6.  
For details on adding titles to the contents of the VTR  
memory bank, refer to 4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Dataon  
page 4-11.  
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the f  
or F buttons twice to select the / direction.  
Note  
4 Press the f button to move the cursor (z) to  
CURRENT SETUP[C], then press the [F6] (EDIT  
TITLE) button to add a title to the current menu  
settings of the VTR.  
The contents of SETUP BANKF cannot be changed.  
For details, refer to 4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data”  
on page 4-11.  
5 Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to  
SETUP BANK, then press the G or g button to  
move the cursor to the number of the VTR  
memory bank to be used for saving the current  
menu settings.  
4-4  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.  
A message appears in the display asking you to  
confirm the operation.  
Recalling menu settings from a VTR  
memory bank  
To cancel the storage operation  
Press the CLR button.  
5,6  
2
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down  
the SFT button.  
The current menu settings are stored to the VTR  
memory bank.  
To add or change a title for VTR settings  
after storing them to the VTR memory bank  
Move the cursor (z) to the number of the VTR  
where the settings are stored, then press the [F6]  
(EDIT TITLE) button.  
3 71 4  
Recalling menu settings from a VTR memory bank  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
2 Press the [F1] (VTR BANK) button.  
EDIT TITLE  
The VTR BANK menu appears in the display.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
VTR BÅNK  
FOOTBALL  
CH.COND  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT SETUP  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BÅNK7  
1 (Preset)  
2 (Preset)  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
UNDO  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
BASEBALL  
ç
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
For more information, refer to 4-1-6 Adding Titles to  
the Dataon page 4-11.  
EDIT  
DIREC-  
TION  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
?
Recovering previous settings after new  
settings have been saved  
Press the [F2] (UNDO) button to recover the  
previous settings.  
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the f  
or F buttons twice to select the ? direction.  
Preventing accidental erasure after saving  
settings  
Move the cursor to the memory bank to be  
protected and press ALT/[F2] (PROTECT)  
buttons. A will appear next to the selected bank.  
4 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the number of the VTR memory bank to be  
recalled.  
5 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
8 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.  
The SET UP menu appears again.  
To cancel the recalling operation  
Press the CLR button.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down  
Notes  
the SFT button.  
Be sure to insert the memory card fully. If the  
memory card is not inserted properly, the MEMORY  
CARD indicator will flash. If this happens, reinsert  
the memory card.  
If the battery in the memory card is dead, the  
MEMORY CARD indicator will flash. If this  
happens, replace the battery in the memory card.  
The ACCESS button flashes while the VTR is  
writing to or reading from a memory card. Do not  
eject the memory card while the indicator is flashing.  
The menu settings are recalled from the selected  
VTR memory bank.  
When the recalling process has been completed,  
the title of the VTR bank appears under  
CURRENT SETUP in the display.  
VTR BÅNK  
FOOTBALL  
CH.COND  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT SETUP  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BÅNK7  
1 (Preset)  
2 (Preset)  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
UNDO  
BASEBALL  
ç
Formatting a memory card  
EDIT  
DIREC-  
TION  
The supplied memory card or other memory cards  
must be formatted before you can use them.  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
?
3,4,5  
2
7 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.  
The SET UP menu appears again.  
4-1-5 Memory Card Function  
1
You can store menu settings in the VTR memory  
banks and cue point data to an memory card for recall  
later.  
The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up when you  
insert a memory card.  
Formatting a memory card  
1 Insert the memory card.  
The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up.  
You can then access the MEMORY CARD menu  
directly from other menus (HOME/TC/CUE/PF1/PF2)  
by pressing the ACCESS button.  
2 Press the ACCESS button.  
MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
FOOTBALL  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
MEMORY CARD indicator  
ACCESS button  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK0  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
(Preset) 4  
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT SETUP  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 (Preset)  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
UNDO  
SHOW  
SETUP  
SHOW  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
Memory card insertion slot  
Memory card function  
3 Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button.  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
To eject the memory card  
Press the button on the right side of the insertion slot.  
4-6  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button while  
holding down the SFT button.  
4 Move the cursor to the VTR side using the [>]  
button and use the G and g buttons to move the  
cursor to the memory bank where the data is to be  
saved.  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display again.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
5 Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button while  
holding down the SFT button.  
TENNIS  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK4  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
The VTR starts formatting the card.  
(Preset  
.
)
..  
1
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
(Preset) 4  
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
Destination  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
To cancel formatting  
Press the CLR button while the confirmation  
message appears in the display.  
SHOW  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
?
Storing the contents of the VTR memory  
banks to a memory card  
To store the current VTR menu settings  
Move the cursor (z) to the [C] (CURRENT  
SETUP) position.  
7,8  
2
To store all VTR memory banks  
Press the [F7] (SELECT ALL) button.  
5 Move the cursor to the MEMORY CARD side  
using the [>] button, and use the G and g buttons  
to move the cursor (z) to the bank number  
(MEMORY CARD side) where the data is to be  
saved.  
6 3 91 4,5  
Storing the contents of the VTR memory banks to a memory card  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TENNIS  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK4  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
(Preset) 4  
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.  
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the  
display.  
VTR memory  
bank number  
SHOW  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
You can access the MEMORY CARD menu  
directly by pressing the ACCESS button.  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
?
MEMORY CÅRD  
FOOTBALL  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
6 To change the title of the bank, press the [F6]  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK0  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
(Preset) 4  
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
VTR BÅNK  
(EDIT TITLE) button.  
CURRENT SETUP  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
For details, refer to 4-1-6 Adding Titles to the  
Dataon page 4-11.  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
SHOW  
CUESET  
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
(Continued)  
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the  
[<] or [>] buttons twice to select the ? direction.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
8 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down 2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.  
the SFT button.  
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the  
display.  
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly  
from any menu screen by pressing the ACCESS  
button.  
The control panel stores the specified VTR  
memory bank to the IC memory card.  
After the storage is complete, the title of the VTR  
memory bank appears under the MEMORY CARD  
indication.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TENNIS  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
TENNIS  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK4  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
VTR BÅNK  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK4  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
TENNIS  
4
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
SETUP  
TENNIS  
4
SHOW  
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
CUESET  
SHOW  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
?
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
?
3 Press the [F4] (SHOW CUESET) button.  
Preventing accidental erasure after saving  
settings  
The display for storing cue point lists appears.  
Press ALT/[F2] (PROTECT) buttons and a  
symbol will appear to the right of the memory card  
bank number  
MEMORY CÅRD  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TENNIS  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CUE POINT SET1  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT CUESET  
ç TENNIS  
UNDO  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
(Blank)  
SHOW  
9 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.  
SETUP  
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before  
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.  
SHOW  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
Storing cue point lists to a memory card  
You can store up to 8 pages of cue point lists to a  
memory card along with titles.  
To return to the MEMORY CARD menu  
Press the [F3] (SHOW SETUP) button.  
6,7  
23  
4 Press the [F8] button or press the [<] or [>] buttons  
twice to select the ? direction.  
5 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the number of the memory bank in the memory  
card where you want to store the cue point list.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TENNIS  
8 4 91 5  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CUE POINT SET1  
VTR BÅNK  
Storing cue point lists to an IC memory card  
CURRENT CUESET  
ç TENNIS  
UNDO  
Bank number in  
the memory card  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
(Blank)  
SHOW  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
SETUP  
SHOW  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
?
4-8  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TENNIS  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK4  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
the SFT button.  
TENNIS  
4
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
The VTR stores the cue point list to the memory  
card.  
SHOW  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
8 Press the [F6] (EDIT TITLE) button to add a title  
/
to the cue point list.  
For details, refer to 4-1-6 Adding Titles to the  
Dataon page 4-11.  
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the  
[<] or [>] buttons twice to select the / direction.  
Preventing accidental erasure after saving  
settings  
Move the cursor (z) to the cue point set number you  
wish to save and press ALT/[F2] (PROTECT) buttons.  
A symbol will appear to the right of the cue point set  
number.  
4 Move the cursor to the memory card side using the  
[<] button and use the G or g buttons to place the  
cursor (z) by the memory bank where the settings  
were saved.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
BASEBALL  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
9 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BANK0  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before  
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.  
Bank number in  
the memory card  
(Preset  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
TENNIS  
.
)
..  
1
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
4
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
SHOW  
CUESET  
Recalling the contents of a memory card  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
The contents stored in a memory card can be recalled  
to the current VTR memory bank.  
/
5 To change the title of the memory bank, press the  
[F6] (EDIT TITLE) button.  
7,8  
2
The title can be also be changed after the settings  
are recalled.  
For details, refer to4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Dataon  
page 4-11.  
(Continued)  
5 3 91 4,6  
Recalling the contents of an IC memory card  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.  
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the  
display.  
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly  
from anu menu screen by pressing the ACCESS  
button.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
6 Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the  
Recalling a cue point list from a memory  
card  
VTR side, then press the G or G button to move  
the cursor to the VTR memory bank number where  
the recalled data are to be stored.  
Recalling a cue point list from a memory card replaces  
the current VTR cue point list with the recalled data.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
(Preset)  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK0  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 5  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
6,7  
23  
UNDO  
BASEBALL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5
SETUP  
TENNIS  
4
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
VTR memory  
bank number  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SHOW  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
4 81 5  
To change the current VTR menu settings  
Recalling a cue point list in a memory card  
Move the cursor (z) to [C] (CURRENT SETUP).  
1 Press the SET UP button.  
To replace all VTR memory bank contents  
with memory card data  
The SET UP menu appears in the display.  
Press the [F7] (SELECT ALL) button.  
2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.  
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the  
display.  
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly  
by pressing the ACCESS button.  
8 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down  
the SFT button.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CH.COND  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
TENNIS  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
The VTR recalls the contents of the memory card.  
After the recalling process is complete, the title of  
the memory bank of the memory card appears  
under the VTR indication.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CARD BÅNK4  
BÅSEBÅLL 0  
(Preset.).. 1  
(Preset) 2  
(Preset) 3  
VTR BÅNK  
SETUP BANK 2  
ç FOOTBALL  
1 (Preset)  
2 TENNIS  
UNDO  
SHOW  
3 (Preset)  
4 (Preset)  
5 (Preset)  
6 (Preset)  
7 FOOTBALL  
8 (Preset)  
ƒ (Preset)  
SETUP  
TENNIS  
4
(Preset) 5  
(Preset) 6  
FOOTBALL 7  
(Preset) 8  
SHOW  
CUESET  
9 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before  
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
3 Press the [F4] (SHOW CUESET) button.  
The menu for storing cue point lists appears.  
MEMORY CÅRD  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
CINEMA  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CUE POINT SET1  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT CUESET  
ç TENNIS  
UNDO  
CINEMA  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
ƒ
(Blank)  
SHOW  
SETUP  
SHOW  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
CUESET  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
4-10  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To return to the MEMORY CARD menu  
Press the [F3] (SHOW SETUP) button again.  
4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data  
When storing data to a memory bank in a memory card  
or the VTR, you can add a title to the data to make  
data management easier.  
4 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the  
[<] or [>] buttons twice to select the / direction.  
5 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the number of the memory bank in the memory  
card.  
2
MEMORY CÅRD  
FORMÅT  
CÅRD  
CINEMA  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MEMORY CÅRD  
CUE POINT SET1  
VTR BÅNK  
CURRENT CUESET  
ç TENNIS  
UNDO  
CINEMA  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bank number of  
the memory card  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
ƒ
(Blank)  
SHOW  
SETUP  
4 6 1,3  
SHOW  
(Blank)  
(Blank)  
CUESET  
Adding titles to the data  
EDIT SELECT DIREC-  
COPY  
EXIT  
TITLE  
ÅLL  
TION  
/
1 Move the cursor (z) to item to be filled.  
2 Press the [F6] (EDIT TITLE) button to display the  
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.  
EDIT TITLE widnow.  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
EDIT TITLE  
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down  
the SFT button.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
The VTR recalls the cue point list in the memory  
card.  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
After the recalling process is completed, the name  
of the cue point list appears under the CURRENT  
CUESET indication.  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
8 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.  
3 Press the f or F button to select a letter.  
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before  
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.  
EDIT TITLE  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings  
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button .  
4-1-7 Details on VTR Memory  
Bank and Memory Card  
Functions  
The selected letter is entered.  
Most setting of most items can be stored to a VTR  
memory bank or a memory card, with the exception of  
the settings described below:  
EDIT TITLE  
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
Data that can be stored to/recalled from a VTR  
memory bank or a memory card  
Settings of items in the VTR SETUP menu (with the  
exceptions listed below)  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
Contents of the PF1/2 menus  
VTR memory bank titles  
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.  
Data that cannot be stored to/recalled from a  
VTR memory bank or a memory card  
Items related to the hours meter (H01 to H14)  
Current settings are always maintained for these items.  
To enter a space  
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.  
If you enter a wrong character  
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) to go back, then  
reenter a character.  
To cancel the procedure to start again  
Press [F9] (CANCEL) button to start over.  
To change a character  
Press the [<] button to the move the cursor to the  
title box, the press the G or g buttons to move  
the text insertion position.)  
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.  
The entered title is set and the menu displayed  
before you pressed the EDIT TITLE button  
appears again.  
4-12  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1-8 Memory Card Data  
Compatibility  
Data copied onto a memory card can be used on  
control panels connected to other HDW-F500 VTRs.  
Although data is completely compatible between  
VTRs with different optional equipment, take note of  
the following.  
Consider data copied from VTR A to VTR B  
and then to VTR C  
VTR A  
(HKDV-506A SDTI Board installed)  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
701.VIDEO INPUT select  
setting: SDTI  
Internal VTR processing:  
SDTI  
Memory card  
Copy  
VTR B  
(HKDV-506A SDTI Board NOT installed)  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
701.VIDEO INPUT select  
setting: SDTI  
Internal VTR processing:  
SDI  
Copy  
VTR C  
(HKDV-506A SDTI Board installed)  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
701.VIDEO INPUT select  
setting: SDTI  
Internal VTR processing:  
SDTI  
Even though the optional equipment is different in  
VTRs A and B, the VTR SETUP menu settings are  
preserved.  
Even though the VTR SETUP menu settings are  
copied to VTR C after being copied to VTR B, the  
settings from VTR A are copied to VTR C  
Even though settings are copied for optional  
equipment that is not present, the settings are adjusted  
and processed by the VTR internally.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2 HOME Menu  
To activate the HOME menu  
Press the HOME button.  
The HOME menu sets the basic VTR operation  
conditions for recording, playback, and editing.  
The HOME, TC, PF1 and PF2 menus show  
information that includes the VTR operation mode,  
time code of the current position, and time code type,  
etc.  
To change the HOME menu page  
Press the ALT button.  
Channel condition  
Tape remaining  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
HOME  
Name of the displayed menu  
PB/EE  
L 113min GREEN  
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET  
PLÅY  
LOCK  
Operation mode  
PB  
TCR  
2FD F1  
Title of the current VTR SETUP menu  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
IN 00:01:10:00  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
Capstan lock mode  
Servo lock status  
off  
INS  
TC  
off  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
HOME menu display  
For details on time codes, refer to 4-3 TC Menuon page  
4-20.  
4-14  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOME menu  
Button  
[F1]  
Indication  
PB/EE  
Function  
Settings  
Selection of output signals  
Disables recording  
PB, EE  
[F2]  
REC INH  
off, < all, crash REC, video/CTL,  
audio/CTL >, [casst]  
Note  
The [casst] indicator is only displayed  
when the record-protect plug is set to  
prevent recording. This setting  
cannot be selected.  
[F3]  
ASSEMBLE  
INS TC  
Selects edit mode and edit channel  
on, off  
[F4]  
[F5]  
INS VIDEO  
INS A-CH1  
INS A-CH2  
INS A-CH3  
INS A-CH4  
INS CUE  
[F6]  
[F7]  
[F8]  
[F9]  
[F10]  
ALT/[F1]  
ALT/[F3]  
ALT/[F5]  
ALT/[F6]  
ALT/[F7]  
ALT/[F10]  
PRE READ  
FREEZE  
Setting for pre-reading  
off, video, audio, a/v  
Selects still-picture output.  
CAP LOCK  
PREROLL  
DMC  
Selects CAP LOCK (capstan servo lock) mode. 2FD, 4LOCK, 4HOLD  
Sets the preroll time.  
0 to 30 s  
Selects DMC playback.  
Restores the last edit point set.  
LAST EDIT  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2 HOME Menu  
Note  
4-2-1 Selecting the Output  
Signals(PB/EE)  
When PB/PB is selected during shuttle mode, audio  
output is muted for playback speeds of more than 1 or  
+2 times normal speed.  
The audio/video output signals from the line output  
and monitor output connectors can be temporarily  
changed from their current settings to another set of  
settings by pressing the [F1] (PB/EE) button. The  
video, digital audio, and analog cue channel output  
signals are toggled to the other set of settings while the  
button is pressed.  
4-2-2 Record Inhibit Mode  
(REC INH)  
Record inhibit mode is selected by pressing the [F2]  
(REC INH) button. Every time the button is pressed,  
the setting toggles between off and <all, crash REC,  
video/CTL, audio/CTL>.  
Output Signal Selection  
The record inhibit area is selected using the 003.REC  
INHIBIT AREA select setting in the VTR SETUP  
menu.  
all: All recording is prohibited. (The REC INHIBIT  
indicator will be lit.)  
Output signal selection is made using the 017.PB/EE  
SELECT MENU. Output signal types for different  
operation modes of this VTR are shown below.  
Output  
Channel  
crash REC: The normal record mode is disabled.  
Use this setting when you want to record only  
during assemble editing or insert editing.  
video/CTL: Video and CTL signal recording is  
inhibited.  
Audio/CTL: Audio and CTL signal recording is  
inhibited.  
[casst]: This is displayed when recording is inhibited  
because the record-protect plug is set. This setting  
cannot be selected.  
Video/Audio  
VTR  
Operation  
Mode  
PB/MU  
EE/MU  
Standby off  
Standby on  
Playback  
Record  
Edit  
EE/EE  
PB/MU  
EE/EE  
PB/PB1)  
EE/EE  
EE/EE  
PB/PB  
PB/PB  
Shuttle3)  
PB/MU  
EE/EE  
PB/PB  
Jog  
PB/PB  
PB/PB  
PB/MU  
PB/MU  
Variable  
INPUT CHECK  
button  
INPUT2)  
1) Output signals during playback are PB/PB only. Output  
signals cannot be selected with 017.PB/EE SELECT  
MENU.  
2) When the INPUT CHECK button is held down, the  
INPUT signals (audio and video) are output. Output  
signals cannot be selected with 017.PB/EE SELECT  
MENU. When the INPUT signals are output, only  
monitor output is changed. Line output signals are not  
changed.  
REC INHIBIT indicator  
3) Pressing the [F1] (PB/EE) button changes the output  
signals during shuttle mode in the following ways.  
VTR SETUP MENU 017. PB/  
EE SELECT MENU settings  
Output signals while the  
[F1] (PB/EE) button is held  
down  
PB/MU  
PB/PB  
EE/EE  
EE/EE  
EE/EE  
PB/MU  
4-16  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2-5 Still-Picture Output  
(FREEZE)  
4-2-3 Selecting the Edit Mode  
and Edit Channel (ASSEMBLE or  
INS CUE)  
For stillpicture output, press the ALT/[F3] (FREEZE)  
button. The picture that was playing just before the  
button was pressed will be frozen on the screen. Make  
the field or frame selection using the 902.FREEZE  
MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu.  
Select assemble or insert edit mode.  
Selecting assemble edit mode  
To maintain the still-picture  
Press [F3] (ASSEMBLE) in the HOME menu.  
Set 903. FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in  
the VTR SETUP menu to latch.  
The still-picture output is maintained until the [F3]  
(FREEZE) button is pressed again.  
Selecting the insert edit mode  
Press one of the following buttons in the HOME menu:  
[F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1),  
[F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-  
CH4), [F10] (INS CUE).  
To temporarily output a still-picture  
Set 903. FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in  
the VTR SETUP menu to momentary. A still-picture  
is output as long as you hold down the [F3] (FREEZE)  
button.  
For more information about editing operations, refer to  
Chapter 6 Editingon page 6-1.  
Stop-freeze function  
4-2-4 Preread Settings  
(PRE READ)  
To automatically output a still-picture when the VTR  
is changed to stop mode, set 905. STOP FREEZE  
CONTROL in the VTR SETUP menu to enable.  
This setting allows pre-reading (reading before  
writing) in insert edit mode. To select pre-reading,  
press the ALT/[F1] (PRE READ) button.  
Pressing the button, cycles the settings from off, video,  
audio, a/v.  
off: No pre-reading  
video: Pre-read the video signals (PREREAD  
indicator will be lit)  
Note  
Regardless of the setting of 902.FREEZE MODE in  
the VTR SETUP menu, stop-freeze is always a field-  
freeze picture.  
audio: Pre-read the audio signals (PREREAD  
indicator will be lit)  
a/v: Pre-read both audio and video signals  
(PREREAD indicator will be lit)  
[F1] button  
PREREAD indicator  
The pre-read function can be used for pre-read editing.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2 HOME Menu  
4-2-6 Selecting the Capstan  
Servo Lock Mode (CAP LOCK)  
4-2-7 Setting the Preroll Time  
(PREROLL TIME)  
Press the ALT button, then the [F5] (CAP LOCK)  
button to select the capstan servo lock mode when you  
edit or play a tape with composite signals.  
Set the preroll time by pressing the ALT button, then  
press the [F6] (PREROLL TIME) button.  
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1-  
second units. During editing on this VTR, a preroll  
time of 5 seconds or more is recommended.  
2FD: The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields. The  
color framing operation is disabled. This is the  
normal setting for editing or playback of HD or  
D1 signals.  
Setting the preroll time  
4LOCK: The capstan servo is locked to the color  
frame every 4 fields. If color frames occur  
intermittently during playback, the capstan servo  
is locked when the next color frame appears.  
4HOLD: The capstan servo is locked to the color  
frame every 4 fields. If color frames occurs  
intermittently during playback, the capstan servo  
stays locked to that color frame.  
1,3  
2
Notes  
This setting is only active only when the frame  
frequency of the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
To lock composite signal output to four fields on this  
VTR, select the signal input to the REF. IN SD  
connector as a reference signal.  
Setting the preroll time  
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F6] (PREROLL  
TIME) button.  
A data entry window appears.  
Composite signal output cannot be locked to eight  
fields on this VTR.  
2 Change the setting with the G and g buttons.  
You may also use the + and buttons.  
3 Press the [F6] (PREROLL TIME) button.  
The data entry window disappears.  
4-18  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2-8 Selecting DMC Playback  
(DMC)  
4-2-9 Recalling Edit Points  
(LAST EDIT)  
In DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback mode,  
the VTR plays back a tape segment at a specified  
variable speed of 1 to +2 times normal playback  
speed, memorizes the speed, then plays the segment  
back at a later time at the memorized speed.  
While editing, you can recall the last edit points by  
pressing the ALT button, then the [F10] (LAST EDIT)  
button.  
The edit points appear in the display.  
DMC playback is useful during on-the-spot telecasts of  
sporting events for immediate playback and broadcast  
of highlight scenes for which starting and ending  
points have been set during recording.  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
PB/EE  
PB  
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
Edit points  
IN 00:01:10:00  
off  
For detail on the procedure for DMC playback, see Section  
5-4-4, DMC Playbackon page 5-14.  
INS  
TC  
off  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
During tape editing using two HDW-F500 VTRs, you  
can use DMC playback to control the playback speed  
of the player VTR for editing at variable speeds (DMC  
editing).  
off off off off off  
off  
Recalling edit points (LAST EDIT)  
For detail on the procedure for DMC editing, see Section  
6-2-1, Performing DMC Editingon page 6-15.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
To activate the TC menu  
Press the TC button.  
The TC menu allows you to set time code-related  
items through a single menu. The HOME, TC, PF1  
and PF2 menus show information that includes the  
VTR operation mode, time code of the current  
position, and the time code type, etc.  
To change the TC menu page  
Press the ALT button.  
INTRP (interpolation): This appears when time  
code cannot be read correctly and correction  
has been performed.  
TCR: Time data type  
(CTL/TCR/UBR/TCG/UBG/DUR)  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
TC  
TIMER  
SEL  
L 113min GREEN  
Data entry window  
TC  
PLAY  
LOCK  
DF 2FD F1  
TCR VITC INTRP  
TIMER  
RESET  
VITC: Time code type (LTC/VITC)  
F1: Field number (F1/F2)  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
TIMER  
SET  
DF: This appears when drop frame  
mode data is being recorded or played  
(DF/NDF).  
AIN: Time data for an AUDIO IN point  
AOUT: Time data for an AUDIO OUT point  
IN: Time data for an IN point  
TIMER  
HOLD  
OUT: Time data for an OUT point  
TC  
TCG  
TCG  
RUN  
DF/NDF VITC  
DF TCG  
SEL  
SOURCE MODE  
MODE  
VITC  
int-L prst  
rec  
TC Menu  
For details on operation modes, refer to 4-2 HOME  
Menuon page 4-14.  
TC menu  
Button  
[F1]  
Indication  
Function  
Settings  
TIMER SEL  
Selects time data type.  
Resets the time counter.  
Sets the time data.  
CTL, TC, UBIT  
TIMER RESET  
TIMER SET  
TIMER HOLD  
TCR SEL  
[F2]  
[F3]  
[F4]  
Holds the time counter.  
Sets the time code reader.  
[F5]  
VITC, auto, LTC  
TCG SOURCE  
[F6]  
Selects the internal/external time code generator.  
int-LTC, int-VITC  
ext-LTC, ext-VITC  
[F7]  
[F8]  
[F9]  
TCG MODE  
RUN MODE  
Sets the time code generator.  
regene, prst, auto  
free, rec  
Selects the running mode of the time code.  
Selects drop frame mode.  
DF, NDF, auto  
DF/NDF  
VITC  
[F10]  
Selects VITC input source  
TCG, V IN  
TAPE TIMER  
ALT/[F1]  
Selects the CTL display mode.  
+/12H, 24H  
ALT/[F2]  
PDPSET MENU  
Activates the menu for presetting the pull-down  
time code.  
(when 23.98PsF/  
24PsF mode is  
selected)  
ALT/[F3]  
(when 25PsF/50i  
mode is  
selected)  
TCCONV MENU  
TCCONV MENU  
Activates the menu for converting the time code  
(24F to 25F).  
ALT/[F3]  
Activates the menu for converting the time code  
(25F to 24F).  
(when 23.98PsF/  
24PsF mode is  
selected)  
ALT/[F4]  
PDTC DISP  
PD CHARA  
Specifies whether or not to display pull down time  
code.  
on, off  
on, off  
ALT/[F5]  
Specifies superimposition of character information  
to the pull down output.  
4-20  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button  
Indication  
Function  
Settings  
ALT/[F6]  
CHARA SUPER  
Specifies superimposition of character information  
to the HD SDI output and HD-SD converter output.  
on, off  
ALT/[F7]  
ALT/[F8]  
ALT/[F9]  
CHARA H-POS  
CHARA V-POS  
VITC POS-1  
Changes the superimposition position (horizontal).  
Changes the superimposition position (vertical).  
0-15  
0-23  
Selects the VITC insertion line in the HD-SD  
converter output.  
12-20(NTSC)  
9-22(PAL)  
ALT/[F10]  
VITC POS-2  
12-20(NTSC)  
9-22(PAL)  
4-3-1 Setting the Time Data  
(TIMER SEL/RESET/SET/HOLD)  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC  
TIMER  
SEL  
TC  
PLAY  
LOCK  
DF 2FD F1  
TCR VITC  
TIMER  
RESET  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
The display shows the following types of time data:  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
TIMER  
SET  
Time data for  
edit points  
Superimposed  
Time data type  
Indication  
display  
TIMER  
HOLD  
TCR LTC  
TCR  
TCR.  
TCG  
CTL  
The LTC1) value read by the  
time code reader during  
playback.  
The VITC1) value read by the  
time code reader during  
playback.  
TC  
TCG  
TCG  
RUN  
DF/NDF VITC  
DF TCG  
SEL  
SOURCE MODE  
MODE  
VITC  
int-L prst  
rec  
TCR VITC  
TCG  
Selecting the time data display  
The value generated by the  
time code generator during  
recording.  
The number of CTL signals2)  
on the tape during recording/  
playing.  
Press the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button repeatedly to  
select the desired time data display.  
CTL  
CTL: Counts the CTL signals on the playback tape  
or the CTL signals being recorded on the tape, and  
displays the tape running time in hours, minutes,  
seconds, and frames.  
TC: Displays the value read by the time code reader  
or the value generated by the time code generator.  
To switch between VITC and LTC, press the [F5]  
(TCR SEL) button.  
UBIT: Displays user bits data inserted in time code  
being played back, or the user bits data inserted in  
time code being recorded. To switch between  
VITC and LTC, press the [F5] (TCR SEL) button.  
UBR  
UBR.  
UBG  
DUR  
The user bits3) value read by  
the time code reader (LTC)  
during playback.  
UBR LTC  
UBR VITC  
UBG  
The user bits value read by the  
time code reader (VITC) during  
playback.  
The user bits value generated  
by the time code generator  
during recording.  
DUR  
Appears whenever a duration  
between any two edit points  
(IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO  
OUT points) is displayed.  
Time data for IN, OUT, AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT  
points are also displayed.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) LTC and VITC  
2) CTL signals  
LTC cannot be read when the tape speed is very slow or  
is changed suddenly. VITC, on the other hand, can be  
read more accurately than LTC when the VTR is stopped  
or the tape speed is very low. VITC, however, cannot be  
read when the tape speed is very fast.  
CTL (control) signals are pulse signals that are recorded  
horizontally in each frame.  
3) User bits  
Comprising a part of the time code, user bits record  
supplementary information and consist of an eight-digit  
number or hexadecimal A to F.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
Selecting the time code and the user bits  
to be recorded  
Use the [F6] (TCG SOURCE), [F7] (TCG MODE),  
[F9] (DF/NDF), and [F10] (VITC) buttons in the TC  
menu to specify the time code and the user bits to be  
recorded. The specifications for the various button  
settings are shown in the following table.  
[F10] (VITC)  
[F7] (TCG  
[F6] (TCG  
[F9] (DF/NDF) Time code and user bits recorded  
MODE)  
SOURCE)  
V IN  
Records the time code and the user bits input from the HD SDI  
INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN1) connector to the video signal  
AUX data area. The time code value generated by the time  
code generator specified by the [F6] and [F7] buttons and the  
user bits value generated by the user bits generator are  
recorded longitudinally on the tape.  
TCG  
prst  
DF/NDF/  
auto2)  
The time code value generated by the time code generator and  
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are  
recorded. Any time code can be specified for the time code  
generator and the user bits generator. The running mode for  
the recorded time code data conforms to that specified by the  
[F9] button.  
regene3)  
int-LTC  
The time code value generated by the time code generator and  
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are  
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator  
lock to the time data recorded longitudinally on the tape.  
int-VITC  
The time code value generated by the time code generator and  
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are  
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator  
lock to the time data recorded in the video signal AUX data  
area on the tape.  
ext-LTC  
The time code value generated by the time code generator and  
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are  
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator  
lock to the time data input from the TIME CODE IN connector.  
ext-VITC  
The time code value generated by the time code generator and  
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are  
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator  
lock to the time data input from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI  
(OPTION) IN1) connector.  
auto  
regene/int-LTCis set in assemble or insert mode and prstis  
set in other modes.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) The SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is operative only  
when the optional HKDV-506A SDTI Board is installed  
and 701.VIDEO INPUT select in the VTR SETUP menu  
is set to SDTI.  
3) Specify the signal to be regenerated with 608.TCG/UBG  
REGENE MODE in the VTR SETUP menu. Signals not  
specified by this menu item are automatically set to  
Preset mode, regardless of the [F7] button setting.  
2) The DF/NDF setting on the [F9] button is applied to the  
time code only when prst is specified by the [F7] button;  
the DF/NDF setting is always applied for the CTL timer.  
4-22  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To cancel entered values  
Press the CLR button.  
Setting time codes  
To set time codes, select prst with the [F7] (TCG  
MODE) button in the TC menu and then follow the  
steps below.  
3 Press the SET button to set the entered  
value.  
If you pressed the + or button, then entered a  
value, the result of calculation appears in the  
display.  
Note  
Set the [F8] (RUN MODE) button to rec before  
setting the time data for recording. When you select  
rec, time data advances from a set value only during  
recording. When you select free, time code advances  
in real time after the initial value has been set.  
During recording, VITC is always written to the  
AUX data area of the video signal.  
SET is displayed.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC  
01 00 30 00  
TIMER  
SEL  
SET  
TC  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR VITC  
2FD F1  
TIMER  
RESET  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
TIMER  
SET  
TIMER  
HOLD  
1 4  
2
TC  
TCG  
TCG  
RUN  
DF/NDF VITC  
DF TCG  
SEL  
SOURCE MODE  
MODE  
VITC  
int-L prst  
rec  
4 Press the [F3] (TIMER SET) button.  
The input value is set as the time code and appears  
in the time data display section.  
3
Setting time codes  
Notes  
Time codes from an external time code generator  
cannot be set.  
Time codes cannot be set when the internal time code  
generator is locked to external time codes or to time  
codes read by the time code reader.  
1 Press the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button to select the  
TC (time code) to be set.  
2 Enter the new setting in the data entry window  
with the numeric buttons.  
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,  
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When  
the entered value is less than eight digits, the  
leading digit(s) is (are) set to 0 when you press the  
SET button.)  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC  
01 00 30 00  
TIMER  
SEL  
Data entry  
window  
TC  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR VITC  
2FD F1  
TIMER  
RESET  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
TIMER  
SET  
TIMER  
HOLD  
TC  
TCG  
TCG  
RUN  
DF/NDF VITC  
DF TCG  
SEL  
SOURCE MODE  
MODE  
VITC  
int-L prst  
rec  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
Setting the CTL timer  
Recording the current time  
1 Select CTL using the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button.  
1 Select DF by pressing the [F9] (DF/NDF) button.  
2 Enter data in the data entry window using the  
2 Select free by pressing the [F8] (RUN MODE)  
number buttons.  
button.  
3 Press the SET button to set the data.  
3 Enter the target time with the numeric buttons  
while verifying the data in the data entry window.  
4 Press [F3] (TIMER SET).  
4 When the target time arrives, press the [F3]  
(TIMER SET) button.  
Note  
When ±12H is selected in the 604.TAPE TIMER  
DISPLAY setting in the VTR SETUP menu and a  
value of 10H or more is entered, the first digit will be  
dropped.  
The time code generator starts operating from the  
specified time.  
To pause the current time  
Resetting time data  
Press the [F4] (TIMER HOLD) button.  
The time is paused only while the button is held down.  
Press the [F2] (TIMER RESET) button.  
The internal time code generator is reset according to  
the setting of the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button.  
4-3-2 Setting the Time Code  
Reader (TCR SEL)  
Resetting TC or UBIT data  
The internal time code generator is reset and the time  
data display becomes 00H00M00S00F (TC) or 00 00  
00 00 (UBIT). Edit points are not affected.  
Press the [F5] (TCR SEL) button to select the time  
code to be read by the time code reader during  
playback.  
VITC: Reads VITC.  
Notes  
auto: Reads VITC when the playback speed is +/1/  
2 times normal speed or less, and LTC when it is  
greater than +/1/2 times normal speed.  
LTC: Reads LTC.  
Depending on the time code recorded on a tape, VITC  
or LTC appears on the display.  
Time data read by the time code reader cannot be  
reset.  
Time data cannot be reset when the internal time code  
generator is locked to external time codes or to time  
codes read by the time code reader.  
Note  
Setting the user bit value  
Time codes that are read by the time code reader or  
played back are output from the TIME CODE OUT  
connector.  
1 Select UBIT by pressing the [F1] (TIMER SEL)  
button.  
2 Enter the desired user bit value in hexadecimal  
notation using the numeric buttons.  
(Press the 0 to 5 buttons while holding down the  
SFT button to enter the letters A to F.)  
3 Press the [F3] (TIMER SET) button.  
4-24  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regenerated signals are selected using the 608.TCG/  
UBG REGENE MODE setting in the VTR SETUP  
menu.  
4-3-3 Setting the Time Code  
Generator (TCG SOURCE/MODE)  
To check the running of the internal time code  
generator  
Press the INPUT CHECK button.  
There are two ways to record time codes on the VTR.  
One way is to record the output of the VTRs internal  
time code generator. The other is to directly record  
time codes that are input from an external time code  
generator.  
The output from the internal time code generator can  
either be set to a specified initial value, or  
synchronized with an external time code generator.  
The internal time code generator time code settings are  
made with the [F6] (TCG SOURCE)/[F7] (TCG  
MODE) buttons. Menu selections and settings are  
shown below.  
4-3-4 Selecting the Time Code  
Running Mode (RUN MODE)  
Press the [F8] (RUN MODE) button to select the time  
code running mode.  
free: The time code advances when the power is on  
regardless of the VTRs operation mode.  
rec: The time code advances only during recording.  
Menu [F6] (TCG  
[F7] (TCG  
Setting  
SOURCE)  
MODE)  
TCG  
Internal  
TCG  
(Preset)  
prst  
Time codes can  
be freely set  
using the  
internal time  
code generator  
4-3-5 Selecting the Drop Frame  
Mode (DF/NDF)  
Internal  
TCG  
(Regenerate)  
int-LTC  
int-VITC  
ext-LTC  
ext-VITC  
regene  
regene  
regene  
regene  
Lock to the time  
data recorded  
on the time code  
tracks  
Press the [F9] (DF/NDF) button to select the running  
mode for the CTL counter and the time code generator.  
DF: Drop frame mode1) (DF is displayed.)  
NDF: Non-drop frame mode2) (NDF is displayed.)  
auto: The unit switches to drop frame mode when the  
field frequency is 59.94 Hz, and switches to non-  
drop frame mode when the field frequency is  
60 Hz.  
Lock to the time  
data recorded  
as video AUX  
data on the tape  
Lock to the time  
data on the  
TIME CODE IN  
connector  
Note  
This setting is only active when the frame frequency  
of the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
When the [F7] (TCG MODE) button is set to regene,  
the drop frame mode is inoperative since the time  
code generator is synchronized to the playback time  
code.  
Lock to the time  
data in the video  
signal on the HD  
SDI INPUT  
connector  
auto  
int-LTC/regene”  
is set in assemble  
or insert mode  
and prstis set in  
other modes  
Note  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) Drop frame mode  
2) Non-drop frame mode  
In order to compensate for differences between time  
code values from the time code generator and the actual  
time that occurs when the field frequency of this unit is  
59.94 Hz, the drop frame mode causes the time code  
generator to omit the first two frames (frame 00 and 01)  
in each minute except the tenth.  
In this mode, drop frame mode processing is not  
performed. Since there is no frame cutting, a  
discrepancy of about 86 seconds occurs each day (in the  
case of a field frequency of 59.94 Hz).  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
2 Press the [F2] (PDPSET MENU) key.  
4-3-6 Inserting VITC input source  
(VITC)  
The PDPSET menu appears.  
Press the [F10] (VITC) button to select the VITC  
source to be written in the video signal AUX data area.  
TCG: Inserts values generated by the internal time  
code generator into the VITC.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
PDPSET  
PRESET  
MODE  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
24F  
24F TC  
PDTIME  
SET  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
V IN: Inserts the VITC from the video input signal  
directly.  
30F TC  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
PDTC  
EXIT  
DF/NDF  
NDF  
4-3-7 Selecting CTL Display  
Mode (TAPE TIMER)  
3 Press the [F1] (PRESET MODE) key to select 24F  
or 30F time code to be preset. The selected time  
code is framed with the thick line.  
Press the ALT button, then the [F1] (TAPE TIMER)  
button to select a 12-hour or 24-hour clock for the  
CTL display.  
+/12H: 12-hour clock  
24H: 24-hour clock  
24F: Presets the 24 frames time code. The A  
frame of the pull down sequence is preset.  
30F: Presets the 30 frames time code. The A  
frame of the pull down sequence is preset.  
4 When 30F is selected in the step 3,  
Press the [F6] (PDTC DF/NDF) key to select DF  
or NDF.  
4-3-8 Presetting Pull Down Time  
Code (PDPSET MENU)  
(when HKDV-507/507D is installed)  
This selection is effective only for 30F time code.  
DF: Drop frame mode  
NDF: Non-drop frame mode  
auto: The unit switches the running mode (DF/  
NDF) automatically according to the frame  
frequency of the unit. When the frame  
frequency is 23.976 Hz, the unit switches to the  
drop frame mode and switches to the non-drop  
frame mode when it is 24 Hz.  
To preset the pull down time code when this VTR is  
operated in 23.98PsF/ 24PsF mode, follow the steps  
below.  
4
3
5 6  
2,7  
When 24F is selected in the step 3,  
Skip this step.  
5 Enter the time code data in the data entry window  
with numeric keys.  
1
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
PDPSET  
PRESET  
MODE  
Data entry  
window  
01 00 30 00  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
24F  
1 Press the TC button, then press the ALT button.  
24F TC  
PDTIME  
SET  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
30F TC  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
PDTC  
EXIT  
DF/NDF  
DF  
4-26  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Press the SET button to set the input data.  
4-3-9 Presetting for Conversion  
From 24-frame Into 25-frame  
Time Code (TCCONV MEMU)  
SET is  
displayed.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
PDPSET  
01 00 30 00  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
PRESET  
MODE  
SET  
24F  
24F TC  
PDTIME  
SET  
When the VTR is operated in 25PsF/50i mode, follow  
the steps below to make the settings for 25-frame  
converted time code.  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
30F TC  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
PDTC  
2
EXIT  
DF/NDF  
DF  
7 Press the [F2] (PDTIME SET) key.  
3
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
PDPSET  
PRESET  
MODE  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
24F  
24F TC  
PDTIME  
SET  
1
01Ó00µ30ß00ƒ  
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT  
30F TC  
button.  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
PDTC  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
EXIT  
DF/NDF  
DF  
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.  
The TC CONVERT menu appears.  
Notes  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC CONVERT  
• Once the time code is preset, it cannot be reverted.  
• Operation information display cannot be displayed  
while the pull down time code appears.  
• The pull down time code cannot be displayed while  
the machine-to-machine editing display appears.  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
24F STARTING TC  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
24F JUMPING TC  
TC  
CONV  
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on  
24F CURRENT TC  
ORG TC  
DISP  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
START START  
on  
JUMP  
EXIT  
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL  
-3H  
24F STARTING TC: Time code used as a reference  
when converting 24-frame time code into 25-  
frame time code.  
24F JUMPING TC: The loopback point for  
converting 24-frame time code to 25-frame time  
code with 24F STARTING TC as the reference  
and the conversion done in both forward and  
reverse directions. Note that the part of the 25-  
frame time code before 24F JUMPING TC is not  
consecutive with the part after 24F JUMPING TC.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
The table below shows an example of how the 25-  
frame time code is not consecutive when 24F  
STARTING TC is set to 01:00:00:00 and 24F  
JUMPING TC is set to 22:00:00:00 (i.e., JUMP TC  
SEL is set to 3H).  
To preset the 24F STARTING TC using the  
numeric buttons  
24 Frames TC 25 Frames TC  
2
3 4  
JUMPING TC  
22:00:00:00  
20:09:36:00  
:
:
01:00:01:01  
01:00:01:00  
:
01:00:01:00  
01:00:00:24  
:
Forward direction  
>
STARTING TC 01:00:00:00  
01:00:00:00  
00:59:59:24  
:
>
00:59:59:23  
Reverse direction  
:
1
22:00:00:01  
22:07:12:01  
21:09:36:00  
Non-consecutive  
part  
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT  
button.  
JUMPING TC  
22:00:00:00  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
3 If necessary, use the function buttons to change the  
settings.  
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.  
For details on the settings made by these buttons,  
see the table below.  
The TC CONVERT menu appears.  
3 Enter the time code in the data entry window with  
TC CONVERT menu  
the numeric buttons.  
Indication  
Function  
Button  
[F3]  
TC CONV  
Specifies whether the time code  
is converted to 25-frame time  
code or not.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC CONVERT  
01 00 00 00  
Data entry window  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
24F STARTING TC  
[F4]  
ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the 24-frame  
time code is displayed or not on  
two lines in the HOME, TC, and  
PF menus along with the  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
24F JUMPING TC  
TC  
CONV  
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on  
24F CURRENT TC  
ORG TC  
DISP  
converted time code.  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
START START  
on  
[F6]  
[F7]  
[F8]  
START TC  
PST  
Press to preset the 24F  
STARTING TC using the  
numeric buttons.  
JUMP  
EXIT  
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL  
-3H  
START TC  
ENT  
Press to enter the current time  
code as the 24F STARTING  
TC.  
4 Press the SET button to set the time code.  
JUMP TC SEL Selects the 24F JUMPING TC  
as an interval from 24F  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC CONVERT  
STARTING TC.  
Selectable values: 3H, 2H, –  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
24F STARTING TC  
1H, +1H, +2H, +3H, 0H  
01Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
[F10]  
EXIT  
Select to exit the TC CONVERT  
menu.  
24F JUMPING TC  
TC  
CONV  
22Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on  
24F CURRENT TC  
ORG TC  
DISP  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
START START  
on  
JUMP  
EXIT  
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL  
-3H  
4-28  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-10 Conversion of Time Code  
During Playback in 25F Mode (TC  
CONV)  
4-3-11 Displaying the Pull Down  
Time Code (when HKDV-507/  
507D is installed)  
When the cassette tape recorded in 24F mode is played  
back in 25F mode (off-speed playback), it is possible  
to convert 24-frame time code to the 25-frame time  
code.  
To display the pull down time code, follow the steps  
below.  
1 Press the TC button, then press the ALT button.  
To convert the time code, follow the steps below.  
2
2,3  
1
1
2 Press the [F4] (PDTC DISP) key to select on.  
on: Displays the pull down time code.  
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT  
button.  
off: Does not display the pull down time code.  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
ALT+TC  
TAPE  
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.  
TIMER  
PLAY  
LOCK  
12H  
The TC CONVERT menu appears.  
TCR  
2FD F1  
PDPSET  
MENU  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
3 Press the [F3] (TC CONV) button to select on.”  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00  
PD  
TC  
CONV  
Each time you press the button, onand off”  
off  
alternate.  
PDTC  
DISP  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on: 24-frame time code is converted to 25-frame time  
off  
PD  
CHARA CHARA CHARA  
VITC  
VITC  
code.  
CHARA SUPER H-POS V-POS POS-1 POS-2  
off off 10 10 16 16  
off: 24-frame time code is not converted to 25-frame  
time code.  
Notes  
This setting is only active when the frame frequency  
of the unit is 25PsF or 50i.  
This setting is effective only for the VITC and time  
code of SONY 9PIN protocol. From the TIME  
CODE OUT connector, 24 frames time code is  
output.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
1 Types of time data  
4-3-12 Superimposition of  
Character Information (PD  
CHARA/CHARA SUPER/H-POS/  
V-POS)  
Symbol  
Meaning  
CTL  
CTL counter data  
TCR  
LTC reader time code data  
LTC reader user bit data  
UBR  
TCR.  
UBR.  
TCG  
VITC reader time code data  
VITC reader user bit data  
Time code data from the time code generator  
User bit data from the time code generator  
To superimpose the characters representing time code  
data and operation mode information on the output  
signals, use the [F4] (PD CHARA) and [F6] (CHARA  
SUPER) buttons.  
UBG  
Button Setting Connector to which the  
characters are superimposed  
Note  
ALT/[F4] on  
PULL DOWN OUT connector (on two  
connectors)  
When time data or user bits are not read correctly, a  
*will be displayed in this block so that the symbols  
become T*R, U*R, etc.  
ALT/[F6] on  
HD SDI MONITOR connector  
COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector  
of D CONV. OUT(OPTION)  
3(SUPER) of connector D CONV. SDI  
OUT(OPTION)  
2 Time code reader drop frame marks  
“ • ”: drop frame mode  
: : non-drop frame mode  
3 Time code generator drop frame marks  
“ • ”: drop frame mode  
Contents of superimposed data  
: : non-drop frame mode  
1 Types of time data  
4 VITC data field marks  
: (blank space) fields 1 and 3  
Time data  
* : fields 2 and 4  
2 Drop frame mark of the time  
code reader  
5 Operation mode  
3 Drop frame mark of the time  
The contents are divided into blocks A and B as shown  
below.  
code generator  
A block indicates the operation mode.  
B block indicates the tape speed or servo lock status.  
4 Field mark of the  
VITC data  
T
C
R
S
.
2
3
T
:
5
L
9
.
4
0
T
.
I
1
L
8
L
*
H
U
T
E
S
5 Control VTR indication  
Contents of superimposed data  
A
B
Note  
The example above shows the factory-set contents of  
data.  
By changing the 626.DISPLAY INFORMATION  
select setting in the VTR SETUP menu, different types  
of information can also be displayed on the second  
line.  
4-30  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation modes  
Operation mode  
Display  
A block  
B block  
TAPE UNTHREAD  
STANDBY OFF  
T.RELEASE  
STOP  
Cassette not inserted  
Standby off mode  
Tension release mode  
Stop mode  
PREROLL  
PLAY  
Preroll mode  
Playback mode (servo unlocked)  
Playback mode (servo locked)  
Capstan override mode  
PLAY  
LOCK  
PLY-SPD  
Speed shift from  
normal speed (%)  
REC  
Record mode (servo unlocked)  
Record mode (servo locked)  
Edit mode (servo unlocked)  
Edit mode (servo locked)  
Still-picture jog mode  
Forward jog (is lit)  
Reverse jog (is lit)  
Shuttle mode  
REC  
LOCK  
EDIT  
EDIT  
LOCK  
JOG  
STILL  
JOG  
FWD  
JOG  
REV  
SHUTTLE  
VAR  
(speed)  
(speed)  
(speeda))  
(speeda))  
Variable mode  
DMC  
DMC memorize mode  
DMC edit preview mode  
DMC edit mode  
D-PREV  
DMC EDIT  
DMC-SPD  
PREVIEW  
AUTO EDIT  
REVIEW  
(speed)  
DMC initial speed setting  
Preview mode  
Auto edit mode  
Review mode  
a) Initial speed or memorized speed  
For details about the warning messages, see Warning  
Messageson page A-10.  
To display a warning message  
When there are multiple warning messages, each  
message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next  
message. When there is no warning message, the  
items set in 626. DISPLAY INFORMATION select in  
the VTR SETUP menu flashes on the second line  
instead.  
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8  
*
O
E X T E R N A L  
R E F E  
N
The first 16 characters of the  
warning message  
Set 626. DISPLAY INFORMATION select in the  
VTR SETUP menu to any setting other than time data  
only and set 627. CHAR WARNING DISPLAY at  
dual line mode in the VTR SETUP menu to on. The  
first 16 characters of the warning message flashes on  
the second line.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
To display remaining time on the tape  
Use the 628.REMAIN TIME DISPLAY to display  
remaining time on the tape.  
4-3-13 Setting the VITC Insertion  
Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)  
off: Do not display remaining time.  
10min: Display remaining time when it is 10  
minutes or less.  
VITC signals can be inserted at two positions in the  
output signal from the HD-SD converter.  
on: Always display remaining time.  
When remaining time is 23 minutes.  
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8 R 2 3  
*
When remaining time is five minutes.  
1,3 2  
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8  
R
R
5
*
Setting the VITC insertion line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)  
When remaining time is 100 minutes or over.  
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F9] (VITC POS-1)  
button.  
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8  
*
- -  
The setting display part is lit.  
Examples of remaining time display  
2 Press the G or g button to change the value.  
Changing the superimpose position  
You can also use the + or button.  
The superimpose position can be set to 16 different  
positions in the horizontal directions (0-15) and 24  
different positions in the vertical directions (0-23).  
3 Press the [F9] (VITC POS-1) button.  
The data setting is completed and the setting  
display disappears. Switching to another menu also  
completes the setting display disappears.  
Following the same steps but using the [F10] (VITC  
POS-2) button, VITC can be inserted on another line.  
2
1,3  
1 Press the ALT/[F7] (CHARA H-POS) button to  
change the horizontal position and the [F8]  
(CHARA V-POS) to change the vertical position.  
The setting display part is lit.  
2 Use the [<] and [>] buttons to change the value.  
The + and buttons can also be used.  
3 Press the ALT/[F7] (CHARA H-POS) button or the  
[F8] (CHARA V-POS) button. The positions are  
set and the setting display disappears.  
The positions are also set if another menu is  
selected.  
4-32  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The table below shows an example of how the 24-  
frame time code is not consecutive when 25F  
STARTING TC is set to 01:00:00:00 and 25F  
JUMPING TC is set to 22:00:00:00 (i.e., JUMP TC  
SEL is set to –3H).  
4-3-14 Presetting for Conversion  
From 25-frame Into 24-frame  
Time Code (TCCONV MENU)  
When the VTR is operated in 23.98PsF/24PsF mode,  
follow the steps below to make the settings for 24-  
frame converted time code.  
25 Frames TC 24 Frames TC  
JUMPING TC  
22:00:00:00  
22:52:30:00  
:
:
01:00:01:24  
01:00:00:23  
:
01:00:01:00  
01:00:00:23  
:
Forward direction  
2
>
STARTING TC 01:00:00:00  
01:00:00:00  
00:00:59:23  
:
>
00:00:59:24  
Reverse direction  
:
3
22:00:00:01  
21:52:30:01  
22:52:30:00  
Non-consecutive  
part  
JUMPING TC  
22:00:00:00  
1
3 If necessary, use the function buttons to change the  
settings.  
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT  
button.  
For details on the settings made by these buttons,  
see the table below.  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
TC CONVERT menu  
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.  
Indication  
Function  
Button  
The TC CONVERT menu appears.  
[F3]  
TC CONV  
Specifies whether the time code  
is converted to 24-frame time  
code or not.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC CONVERT  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
[F4]  
ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the 25-frame  
time code is displayed or not on  
two lines in the HOME, TC, and  
PF menus along with the  
25F STARTING TC  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
25F JUMPING TC  
TC  
CONV  
converted time code.  
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on  
25F CURRENT TC  
ORG TC  
DISP  
[F6]  
[F7]  
[F8]  
START TC  
PST  
Press to preset the 25F  
STARTING TC using the  
numeric buttons.  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
START START  
on  
JUMP  
EXIT  
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL  
-3H  
START TC  
ENT  
Press to enter the current time  
code as the 25F STARTING  
TC.  
JUMP TC SEL Selects the 25F JUMPING TC  
as an interval from 25F  
25F STARTING TC: Time code used as a reference  
when converting 25-frame time code into 24-  
frame time code.  
25F JUMPING TC: The loopback point for  
converting 25-frame time code to 24-frame time  
code with 25F STARTING TC as the reference  
and the conversion done in both forward and  
reverse directions. Note that the part of the 24-  
frame time code before 25F JUMPING TC is not  
consecutive with the part after 25F JUMPING TC.  
STARTING TC.  
Selectable values: –3H, –2H, –  
1H, +1H, +2H, +3H, 0H  
[F10]  
EXIT  
Select to exit the TC CONVERT  
menu.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 TC Menu  
To preset the 25F STARTING TC using the  
numeric buttons  
4-3-15 Conversion of Time Code  
During Playback in 24F Mode (TC  
CONV)  
When the cassette tape recorded in 25F mode is played  
back in 24F mode (off-speed playback), it is possible  
to convert 25-frame time code to the 24-frame time  
code.  
2
3 4  
To convert the time code, follow the steps below.  
2,3  
1
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT  
button.  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.  
1
The TC CONVERT menu appears.  
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT  
3 Enter the time code in the data entry window with  
button.  
the numeric buttons.  
The ALT+TC menu appears.  
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC CONVERT  
01 00 00 00  
Data entry window  
The TC CONVERT menu appears.  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
25F STARTING TC  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
3 Press the [F3] (TC CONV) button to select on.”  
25F JUMPING TC  
TC  
Each time you press the button, onand off”  
CONV  
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on  
alternate.  
25F CURRENT TC  
ORG TC  
DISP  
on: 25-frame time code is converted to 24-frame time  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
START START  
on  
code.  
JUMP  
EXIT  
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL  
-3H  
off: 25-frame time code is not converted to 24-frame  
time code.  
Notes  
4 Press the SET button to set the time code.  
This setting is only active when the frame frequency  
of the unit is 23.98PsF or 24PsF.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min GREEN  
TC CONVERT  
This setting is effective only for the VITC and time  
code of SONY 9PIN protocol. From the TIME  
CODE OUT connector, 25 frames time code is  
output.  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
25F STARTING TC  
01Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
25F JUMPING TC  
TC  
CONV  
22Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
on  
25F CURRENT TC  
ORG TC  
DISP  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
START START  
on  
JUMP  
EXIT  
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL  
-3H  
4-34  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
The HDW-F500 allows you to register up to 100 cue  
points (0 to 99), and to manage cue points in groups of  
10 (per page).  
Cue point settings, deletions, and page settings are  
done through the CUE menu.  
Note  
Cue point data is factory set to be erased when a  
cassette is inserted.  
To select whether to erase cue point data  
when a cassette is inserted.  
Press the [F10] (M-CUE CLEAR) button to select  
whether to erase cue point data when a cassette is  
inserted.  
For details on storing cue point data, refer to 4-1-5  
Memory Card Functionon page 4-6.  
To activate the CUE menu  
Press the CUE button.  
on: Erase cue point data.  
off: Do not erase cue point data.  
Data entry window  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
]
Title  
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Page number indication  
Cue point indication  
TELE  
FILE  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
CUE menu display  
CUEmenu  
Button  
[F1]  
Indication  
Function  
Settings  
PREV PAGE  
NEXT PAGE  
TELEFILE  
Showsthepreviouspage.  
Showsthenextpage.  
[F2]  
[F4]  
OpenstheTELEFILEmenu.  
[F5]  
Specifiestheprerolltimetoacuepoint.  
Specifiesthepagenumber.  
CUE P-ROLL  
PAGE SET  
0 to 30 s  
on,off  
[F8]  
[F9]  
CUENUM SET  
M-CUE CLEAR  
PAGE MODE  
EXTEND MODE  
Specifiesthecuenumber.  
Erasescuepointdatawhenacassetteisinserted.  
SelectsPAGEmode.  
[F10]  
ALT/[F8]  
ALT/[F9]  
SelectsEXTENDmode.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
4-4-2 Registering Cue Points  
4-4-1 Selecting a Multi-Cue Mode  
There are two ways to register cue points: (1) by direct  
registration of the tape address when the ENTRY  
button is pressed, and (2) by the entry of cue point data  
with the numeric buttons.  
The HDW-F500 has the following two multi-cue  
modes.  
PAGE mode  
Registering cue points by pressing the  
ENTRY button  
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE MODE)  
button.  
In PAGE mode, cue point data can be accessed by  
page number, thus speeding up cue point registration  
and cuing operations.  
2
Display  
Cue points are displayed in groups of 10, number 0 to  
9, 10 to 19, etc. Each display is a page.  
Selecting a page  
There are the three following ways to select a page:  
Press the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button.  
The previous page is shown.  
Press the [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button.  
The next page is shown.  
1 5 3  
4
Registering cue points by pressing the ENTRY button  
Enter the desired page number with the numeric  
button, then press the [F8] (PAGE SET) button.  
If you enter 1, for example, page one appears,  
containing cue point numbers 10 to 19.  
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE  
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)  
button.  
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV  
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or  
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number  
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]  
(PAGE SET) button).  
EXTEND mode  
Press the ALT button, then the [F9] (EXTEND  
MODE) button.  
In EXTEND mode, you can do operations that cannot  
be done in page units, such as the consecutive  
registration of more than 10 cue points.  
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the cue number to be registered.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
Display  
The screen displays a list of 100 consecutive cue  
points which can be scrolled. Press the G or g button  
to scroll the list. Page columns are not displayed.  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To quickly scroll through a list  
Press the G or g button while holding down the SFT  
button.  
TELE  
FILE  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
4-36  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To select the cue number directly by  
numeric buttons  
Enter the cue number in the data entry window  
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM SET) button.  
Registering cue points by the numeric  
buttons  
2
4
4 Press the JOG or VAR button, then rotate the  
search dial to find the position where you want to  
register the cue point.  
5 Press the ENTRY button at the selected position.  
The current tape address of the position where the  
button is pressed is registered as a cue point.  
Press the ENTRY button repeatedly to register the  
cue point repeatedly. The cue number will  
automatically increment by one each time.  
1 5 3  
Registering cue points by the numeric buttons  
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE  
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)  
button.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV  
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or  
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number  
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]  
(PAGE SET) button).  
TELE  
FILE  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the cue number to be registered.  
Note  
In PAGE mode, the cue number advances only within  
the current page when the ENTRY button is pressed  
repeatedly. For example, after cue number 19 is  
registered and the ENTRY button is pressed, the cue  
point 10 comes up as the next cue point. In EXTEND  
mode, if you press the ENTRY button after registering,  
for example, cue point No.99, the next cue point is  
registered to cue point No.99 again.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TELE  
FILE  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
To select the cue number directly by the  
numeric buttons  
Enter the cue number in the data entry window  
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM SET) button.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
4 Enter the cue point data in the data entry window  
with the numeric buttons, then press the SET  
button.  
4-4-3 Erasing Cue Point Data  
To erase any cue point data, blank out the data entry  
window, then do the cue point registration procedure.  
For example, to enter 00:01:30:00, press 0, 0, 1, 3,  
0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When the  
entered value is less than eight digits, the leading  
digit(s) is (are) set to 0 when you press the SET  
button.)  
2
4
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
CUE  
00 01 30 00  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
PREV  
PÅGE  
SET  
Entered data  
[I ÅM CUE  
TITLE  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 5 3  
TELE  
FILE  
Erasing cue point data  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE  
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)  
button.  
To modify current cue point data  
Press the + or button, enter the value to be added  
or subtracted, then press the SET button.  
The computation is performed and the results  
appear in the data entry window.  
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV  
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or  
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number  
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]  
(PAGE SET) button).  
5 Press the ENTRY button to set the entered data.  
The data are registered in the cue point data  
indication.  
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the cue number to be erased.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
]
[I ÅM CUE  
TITLE  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:01:30:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TELE  
FILE  
TELE  
FILE  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
P-ROLL  
To select the cue number directly by  
the numeric buttons  
Enter the cue number in the data entry window  
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM SET) button.  
4-38  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press the CLR button then the SET button.  
4-4-4 Prerolling to a Cue Point  
SETappears in the data entry window.  
Select the preroll time to a cue point with pressing the  
[F5] button.  
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1-  
second units.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
SET  
Data entry  
window  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
00:02:10:00  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Prerolling to a cue point  
TELE  
FILE  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
2
5 Press the ENTRY button.  
Data for the specified cue number are erased and  
the data column becomes blank.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00  
[I ÅM CUE TITLE  
CUE  
PREV  
PÅGE  
1
3 4  
]
NEXT  
PÅGE  
PÅGE: 0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
00:01:10:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Erased cue point  
00:03:10:00  
00:04:10:00  
00:05:10:00  
00:06:10:00  
00:07:10:00  
00:08:10:00  
00:09:10:00  
00:10:10:00  
Prerolling to a cue point  
TELE  
FILE  
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE  
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)  
button.  
CUE  
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE  
SET SET CLEAR  
P-ROLL  
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV  
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or  
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number  
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]  
(PAGE SET) button).  
To erase all cue point data  
Press the CLR button while holding down the SFT  
button. A message asking you to confirm the  
operation appears in the display.  
In EXTEND mode, press the CLR button while  
holding down the SFT button again to erase all  
data for cue points No. 0 to No. 99.  
In PAGE mode, press the CLR button while  
holding down the SFT button again to erase data  
for the cue points on the current page.  
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to  
the cue number.  
To select the cue number directly by the  
numeric buttons  
Enter the cue number in the data entry window  
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM SET) button.  
4 Press the PREROLL button.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
4-4-5 Changing a Cue Point Into  
an Edit Point  
4-4-6 Backspace Editing  
You can perform backspace editing with the CUE  
menu. In backspace editing, assemble editing is  
performed from the recording end point. Since the  
data specifying recording end point are cleared when  
you eject the tape, after inserting a tape, you must  
record for at least one minute or so on the tape before  
you can do backspace editing. After recording, the  
present end of the recorded position becomes the  
recording end point. When you press the REC/EDIT  
button afterwards, the VTR automatically prerolls a  
few seconds before the recording end point and starts  
assemble editing. If no data for the recording end  
point exist, backspace editing is not performed.  
Follow the procedures below to change a selected cue  
point into an edit point.  
To change an edit point into an IN point  
Press the SET button while hoding down the IN  
button.  
To change an edit point into an OUT point  
Press the SET button while holding down the OUT  
button.  
To change an edit point into an AUDIO IN  
point  
Note  
Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO  
IN button.  
Cue point data is cleared when a cassette is inserted.  
However, cue point data recalled from a memory card  
before a cassette is inserted is not cleared when a  
cassette is inserted.  
To change an edit point into an AUDIO OUT  
point  
Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO  
OUT button.  
AUDIO IN button AUDIO OUT button  
IN button  
SET button  
OUT button  
4-40  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4-7 TELE FILE Menu  
Use the TELE FILE menu to read and update cue point  
information, log(IN/OUT points) information and  
cassette-management information on optional MLB-  
1B-100 memory labels.  
Operations through the TELE FILE menu can be  
carried out from either the control panel of the VTR or  
a personal computer connected to the VTR. To use the  
control panel, specify control panelfor item  
123.Tele-File CONTROL MODE in the VTR SETUP  
menu. To use a personal computer, specify RS-  
232C.”  
Exiting the TELE FILE menu  
Press the [F10] (WRITE/EXIT) button. The entered or  
modified data is saved to the memory label and the  
VTR exits the TELE FILE menu.  
Note  
If TELE FILE menu operations are prohibited (see  
page 4-39) while the contents of a memory label are  
being modified, only the data modified prior to the  
prohibition will be saved to the memory label when the  
[F10](WRITE/EXIT) button is pressed.  
Note  
Before you can use the menu to operate the VTR from  
a personal computer, the optional MLZ-100 memory  
label application software must be installed in the  
computer.  
To exit the TELE FILE menu without saving  
data to a memory label  
Press the EJECT button. Or, press the ALT/[F2]  
(UNDO ALL) buttons to display a message (in the  
control panel display) requesting confirmation of the  
undoing operation. Then press the [F2](UNDO ALL)  
button while pressing down the SFT button. All  
changes to the memory label will be cancelled.  
For details on the use of a personal computer, refer to the  
operation manual supplied with the optional MLZ-100  
memory label application software.  
The explanations of menu operations in this chapter  
assume the use of the VTR control panel.  
Note  
When you press the EJECT button, all controls on the  
VTR will become inoperable until the cassette is  
completely ejected.  
Opening the TELE FILE menu  
If you accidentally press the EJECT button  
before saving data to a memory label  
Insert the cassette again within 30 seconds after the  
ejection and press the [F10](WRITE/EXIT) button.  
The data that existed before the ejection of the cassette  
is saved to the memory label.  
Do one of the following:  
Press the [F4] (TELE FILE) button while in the CUE  
menu.  
Select onfor item 124.Tele-File MENU auto popup  
in the VTR SETUP menu. Then, with the HOME,  
TC, CUE, or SETUP menu open, insert a cassette  
bearing an optional MLB-1B-100 memory label into  
the VTR.  
To change the information displayed in the  
TELE FILE menu  
Press the [<] or [>] button.  
To display log data (IN or OUT points) in the  
TELE FILE menu  
Do one of the following:  
Press the [F2] (ENTRY POINT) button while in the  
TELE FILE menu. Then select INPUT.”  
Select IN/OUT Pointfor item 126.Tele-File  
ENTRY POINT in the VTR SETUP menu.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
Four levels of information can be displayed in the TELE File menu and the levels can be scrolled to the left or  
right by pressing the [<] or [>] button.  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
SCAN  
1
2
SCAN  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
No.  
Time  
Mrk  
NG  
KP  
OK  
OK  
NG  
OK  
IN  
No.  
OUT  
Tk  
1
Cut  
0015  
0015  
0015  
017~  
Scn  
A01  
A01  
A01  
A01  
B20  
B20  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:04:03  
00:04:04:03  
00:05:05:03  
00:06:06:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:01:01:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:03:03  
00:04:03:03  
00:05:04:03  
00:06:05:03  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00:01:02:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:04:03  
00:04:05:03  
00:05:06:03  
00:06:07:03  
--:--:--:--  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
2
@
3
1
1
CHANGE  
DATA  
CHANGE  
DATA  
2
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
POINT  
INFO  
POINT  
EXIT  
POINT  
INFO  
POINT  
EXIT  
3
45  
8
9
!º  
Line number  
TELE FILE menu display 1  
TELE FILE menu display 3  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
SCAN  
SCAN  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
No. IN  
OUT  
No.  
Comment  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00:01:02:03  
00:01:03:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:04:05:03  
00:05:05:03  
00:06:06:03  
00:07:05:03  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Noisy  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:04:03  
00:04:04:03  
00:05:05:03  
00:06:06:03  
--:--:--:--  
Holiday  
Pretty Good  
for NG Awards  
Goal  
!¡  
CHANGE  
DATA  
CHANGE  
DATA  
Celebration  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
INFO  
POINT EXIT  
POINT  
INFO  
POINT  
EXIT  
POINT  
6
7
TELE FILE menu display 2  
TELE FILE menu display 4  
1REC DATE  
Displays the date the memory label contents were last  
modified.  
8Tk  
Displays the take number of the cue point.  
2TITLE  
9Cut  
Displays the cassette title.  
Displays the cut number of the cue point.  
3Time  
Scn  
Displays the time data of the cue point.  
Displays the scene number of the cue point.  
4Mrk  
Comment  
Displays the cue point attribute (OK/NG/KP/no  
attribute).  
Displays the comment for a cue point.  
5Recording start point setting  
Recording start points are indicated by an @ mark.  
6IN  
Displays IN point data.  
7OUT  
Displays OUT point data.  
4-42  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TELEFILEmenu  
Formatting a memory label  
Button Indication  
Function  
[F1]  
CUE SCAN  
Specifiesthedirectionofthe  
cursormovementwhenthe  
PREROLLbuttonispressed.  
1 Press the ALT/[F1] (FORMAT T-Fil) buttons.  
2 Press the [F1] (FORMAT T-Fil) button while  
[F2]  
SpecifieswhetherINand  
OUTpointdataaredisplayed  
ornotintheTELEFILE  
menu.  
ENTRY POINT  
pressing down the SFT button.  
A message appears (in the control panel display)  
requesting confirmation of the formatting operation.  
[F3]  
COMMNT EDIT Editsthecontentsofthe  
Commentsection.  
CHANGEDATA  
To cancel the formatting operation  
Press the CLR button.  
[F4]  
[F5]  
Modifiesthespecifieddata.  
DEL POINT  
Deletesthetimedataofthe  
cuepoint.  
3 Press the [F1] (FORMAT T-Fil) button while  
pressing down the SFT button.  
MARK  
[F6]  
[F7]  
[F8]  
[F9]  
ChangesthedataintheMrk  
section.  
Write-protectsthecuepoint  
data.  
DisplaystheTAPE  
INFORMATIONwindow.  
Movesthecursortotheline  
specifiedbythenumeric  
buttons.  
PROTECT  
TAPE INFO  
CUENUM POINT  
COMPLETEDappears in the control panel display.  
Selecting the device to be used for TELE  
FILE menu operations  
WRITE/EXIT  
[F10]  
ClosestheTELEFILEmenu  
aftersavingchangestothe  
memorylabel.  
With no cassette inserted, press the ALT/[F5] (T-Fil  
MODE) buttons to select the device.  
232C: The device connected to the RS-232C  
connector on the VTR is used.  
ALT/[F1] FORMATT-Fil  
Formatsthememorylabel.  
Undoesallchanges.  
ALT/[F2] UNDOALL  
panel: The VTR control panel is used.  
ATTRIB EDIT  
ChangestheID, ADMIN, or  
TITLE data in the TAPE  
INFORMATIONwindow.  
Copiesthetimedataofacue  
pointtoanothercuepoint  
indicatedintheCUEmenu.  
Selectsthedevicetobeused  
forTELEFILEmenu  
ALT/[F3]  
Prohibiting TELE FILE menu operations  
ALT/[F4] COPY to CUE  
Press the ALT/[F7] (WRITE PRTEC) buttons.  
on: All TELE FILE menu operations are prohibited.  
off: All TELE FILE menu operations are permitted.  
T-Fil MODE  
ALT/[F5]  
operations.  
Note  
Thissettingcanbedoneonly  
whennocassetteisinserted  
in the VTR.  
WRITE PRTEC  
ProhibitsTELEFILEmenu  
operations.  
ALT/[F7]  
ALT/[F10] WRITE/EXIT  
ClosestheTELEFILEmenu  
aftersavingchangestothe  
memorylabel.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
4 Press the[F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center  
cursor button.  
Changing a title  
The selected character is entered.  
2
EDIT TITLE  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
4 6 2,3  
1
1 Press the ALT/[F3](ATTRIB EDIT) buttons.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.  
2 Press the G or g button to select TITLE, and then  
To enter a space  
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.  
press the ENTRY button.  
CH.COND  
ALT+TELE FI  
FORMAT  
T-Fil  
If you enter a wrong character  
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.  
Then re-enter the character.  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
UNDO  
ALL  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
No.  
ATTRIB EDIT SELECT  
Scn  
A01  
A01  
A01  
A01  
B20  
B20  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:
ATTR  
EDIT  
00:
TITLE  
00:
ID  
00:
ADMIN  
To start the procedure over again  
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.  
00:
00:
COPY  
Press [ENTRY]to edit  
toCUE  
--:
Press [CLR]to CANCEL  
T-Fil  
MODE  
WRITE  
PRTEC  
To change a character  
Press the G button to move the cursor to the title  
box. Then press the f or F button to change the  
insertion position.  
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.  
If entered title exceeds the length of the  
title box  
“p or p” appears to the left or right of the box.  
EDIT TITLE  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button. The screen  
that was on before the title was entered is  
displayed again.  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
4-44  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To delete a time code  
Changing time data  
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
To enter the current time data  
Time section to be deleted.  
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor () to  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
the line where the time code will be written.  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
2 Press the [F5](DEL POINT) button.  
A message appears (in the control panel display)  
requesting confirmation of the deletion operation.  
Note  
If the cursor () is not linked with the cursor  
buttons, the cursor () will not move when the  
cursor buttons are pressed.  
To delete the line as well as the time code  
Press the [F5] (DEL POINT) button while pressing  
down the SFT button.  
To link the cursor () with the cursor  
buttons  
The line is deleted and all the lines below are  
moved up by one.  
Press the center cursor button. Each press of the  
button alternately links and unlinks the cursor () .  
3 Then, press the [F5] (DEL POINT) button while  
pressing down the SFT button.  
2 Press the ENTRY button.  
The time code section becomes blank and is ready  
for new time code input.  
The time data in the column specified by the cursor  
() changes to the current time code.  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
Note  
SCAN  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
If the cursor () is not on the screen when the  
ENTRY button is pressed, the time data on the line  
currently specified by the cursor () changes to the  
current time data, and the line is automatically  
displayed.  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
No.  
Time  
Mrk  
NG  
KP  
OK  
OK  
NG  
OK  
IN  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:04:03  
00:04:04:03  
00:05:05:03  
00:06:06:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:01:01:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:03:03  
00:04:03:03  
00:05:04:03  
00:06:05:03  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
@
CHANGE  
DATA  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
INFO  
POINT EXIT  
To insert the current time data on a new line  
POINT  
1 Use the cursor buttons to position the cursor ()  
below the line where the time code will be  
inserted.  
To undo the deletion of a time code or line  
Press the ALT/[F2] (UNDO ALL) buttons.  
A message appears (in the control panel display)  
requesting confirmation of the undo operation.  
Press the [F2] (UNDO ALL) button while pressing  
down the SFT button. To cancel the undo  
operation, press the CLR button.  
For details on how to move the cursor, see To enter the  
current time dataabove.  
2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the  
SFT button.  
A new line is inserted above the line specified by  
where the cursor () is placed and the current time  
code is entered on that line.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
To copy time data of a cue point to another  
cue point specified in the CUE menu  
Entering and modifying IN/OUT point data  
You can use either the ENTRY button or the numeric  
buttons to enter and modify IN/OUT point data.  
1 Press the ALT/[F4] (COPY to CUE) buttons.  
A message appears (in the control panel display)  
requesting confirmation of the copy operation.  
To enter or modify IN/OUT point data using  
the ENTRY button  
To cancel the copy operation  
Press the CLR button.  
2 Press the [F4] (COPY to CUE) button while  
pressing down the SFT button.  
The time data of the cue point is copied to the cue  
point indicated in the CUE menu.  
Changing Mrk data  
2 1  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line  
with the mark attribute to be changed, and then press  
the [F6] (MARK) button. Or, move the cursor directly  
to the mark attribute to be changed, and then press the  
[F4] (CHANGE DATA) button. In both cases, each  
press of the button changes the attribute as follows:  
OK n NG nKP (keep temporarily) n blank (no  
attribute).  
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
IN/OUT section on which the current time code is  
to be entered or replaced.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
Changing the recording starting point  
setting  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
recording starting point section. Then press the [F4]  
(CHANGE DATA) button. Each press of the button  
turns the setting on (the @ indication appears) or off  
(the @ indication disappears).  
2 Press the IN button (to enter IN point data) or OUT  
button (to enter OUT point data) while pressing  
down the ENTRY button.  
The current time code is entered as the IN/OUT  
point data or it replaces the existing IN/OUT point  
data.  
Note  
If the cursor is not on the IN/OUT section when  
pressing the IN/OUT button while pressing down  
the ENTRY button, the current time code is  
entered as the Time data or it replaces the existing  
Time data. When pressing the ENTRY button  
only, the Time data is entered or replaced  
regardless of the cursor position.  
4-46  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To enter or modify IN/OUT point data using  
the numeric buttons  
3 Press the IN button (to enter IN point data) or OUT  
button (to enter OUT point data).  
The number is entered as the time code or it  
replaces the existing IN/OUT point data.  
2
To clear the IN/OUT point data  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/  
OUT section to be cleared, and then press the CLR  
button while pressing the IN button (to clear IN point  
data) or OUT button (to clear OUT point data), or  
press the IN or OUT button (to clear both IN and OUT  
point data) while pressing the CLR button.  
1
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
To increase or decrease IN/OUT point data  
one frame at a time  
IN/OUT section to be entered or modified.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/  
OUT section to be increased or decreased, and then  
press the + button (to increase the time data) or the –  
button (to decrease the time data) while pressing the  
IN button or the OUT button. Each time you press the  
+ or button, the time data is increased or decreased  
by one frame, respectively.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
To recall IN/OUT point data to the data entry  
window  
2 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time data in  
the data entry window, and then press the SET  
button.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/  
OUT section to be recalled, and then press the RCL  
button while pressing the IN button (to recall IN point  
data) or the OUT button (to recall OUT point data).  
For example, to enter 00:01:30:00, press the  
numeric buttons as follows: 0, 0, 1, 3, 0, 0, 0.  
(There is no need to enter the first zero. When you  
enter a number that is less than eight digits long,  
the unspecified digits are automatically set to zero  
when the SET button is pressed.  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
00 01 30 00  
CUE  
SCAN  
SET  
Entered time  
data  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
Rest 50%  
ENTRY  
POINT  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
No.  
Time  
Mrk  
NG  
KP  
OK  
OK  
NG  
OK  
IN  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03  
00:01:30:00  
00:03:04:03  
00:04:04:03  
00:05:05:03  
00:06:06:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:01:01:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:03:03  
00:04:03:03  
00:05:04:03  
00:06:05:03  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
@
CHANGE  
DATA  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
INFO  
POINT EXIT  
POINT  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
To enter the current time code continuously  
To preroll to an IN/OUT point  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/  
OUT section and press the IN button (to preroll to an  
IN point) or OUT button (to preroll to an OUT point)  
while pressing the PREROLL button. The VTR  
prerolls to the point and stops.  
1 Set item 127.Tele-File IN OUT input in the VTR  
SETUP menu to on.”  
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
IN/OUT section to be entered.  
For details on setting the preroll time, see 4-2-7 Setting the  
Preroll Timeon page 4-18.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
Note  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
If the cursor is not on the IN/OUT section when  
pressing the IN/OUT button while pressing the  
PREROLL button, the VTR prerolls to the cue point.  
When pressing the PREROLL button only, the VTR  
prerolls to the cue point regardless of the cursor  
position.  
3 Press the IN button (to enter IN point data) or OUT  
button (to enter OUT point data) while pressing  
down the ENTRY button.  
Automatic time data changes during IN/OUT  
point data entry or modification  
The table below shows the automatic changes that  
occur in time data when either the IN point or OUT  
point is changed.  
The movement of the cursor is automatic (as  
described in the table below) and time code is  
entered continuously.  
When IN point data is entered or modified  
Status of input data  
IN point  
OUT point  
Thetimesequenceofthe  
IN/OUTpointdatais  
correct.  
Thedatais  
changed.  
Thedatais  
unchanged.  
Input condition When the IN button is When the OUT  
pressed while  
pressing the ENTRY  
button  
button is pressed  
while pressing the  
ENTRY button  
Thetimesequenceofthe  
IN/OUTpointdataisnot  
correct.  
Thedatais  
changed.  
Thedatais  
deleted.  
OnlyINpoint  
datahas  
INpointdatais  
modifiedandthe  
OUTpointdatais  
enteredandthe  
TheOUTpointhasnot  
beeninput.  
Thedatais  
changed.  
Thedatais  
unchanged.  
beenentered cursorstaysontheIN cursormovestothe  
pointdata.  
nextINpoint.  
OnlyOUT  
INpointdatais  
OUTpointdatais  
modifiedandthe  
cursorstaysonthe  
OUTpoint.  
When OUT point data is entered or modified  
pointdatahas enteredandthe  
beenentered cursormovestothe  
nextINpoint.  
Status of the input data IN point  
OUT point  
Thetimesequenceofthe  
IN/OUTpointdatais  
correct.  
Thedatais  
unchanged.  
Thedatais  
changed.  
BothIN/OUT INpointdatais  
pointdata  
havenot  
beenentered ontheINpointdata.  
orhavebeen  
entered  
OUTpointdatais  
enteredormodified  
andthecursorstays  
ontheOUTpoint  
data.  
enteredormodified  
andthecursorstays  
Thetimesequenceofthe  
IN/OUTpointdataisnot  
correct.  
Thedatais  
unchanged.  
Thedatais  
unchanged.  
TheINpointhasnotbeen Thedatais  
Thedatais  
changed.  
input.  
unchanged.  
To display the duration between an IN point  
and an OUT point  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/  
OUT section and press the IN button and OUT button  
at the same time. The duration between two points  
appears while the buttons are pressed.  
4-48  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Press the [F4] (CHANGE DATA) button.  
Changing Tk data  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the take  
data to be changed. Then use the numeric buttons to  
change the value. Note that only 1-digit or 2-digit  
values can be entered. Or, move the cursor to the take  
data, and press the [F4] (CHANGE DATA) button or  
the + button repeatedly to increase the value in  
increments of 1. Press the button repeatedly to  
decrease the value in increments of 1. Note that the  
value cannot go below 0.  
CUT No. EDIT  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.  
Changing Cut data  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the cut  
data to be changed, and then enter the new data using  
the numeric buttons and +/buttons. Pressing the –  
button enters the tilde (~). Press the numeric buttons  
while pressing down the SFT button to enter uppercase  
letters (A to J). Note that a maximum of four  
characters can be entered.  
CUT No. EDIT  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
Or, do the procedure below to change the data.  
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center  
cursor button.  
The selected character is entered.  
CUT No. EDIT  
B
4 6 1,3  
2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
cut data to be changed.  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.  
To enter a space  
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.  
If you enter a wrong character  
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.  
Then re-enter the character.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
To start the procedure over again  
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.  
2 Press the [F4] (CHANGE DATA) button.  
To change a character  
SCENE No. EDIT  
Press the G button to move the cursor to the cut  
data to be changed. Then press the f or F button  
to move the insertion position.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.  
The screen that was on before the cut data was  
changed is displayed again.  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
To copy Cut data  
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.  
Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is  
to be pasted. Then press the RCL button. The cut data  
from the line above is copied to the selected line.  
SCENE No. EDIT  
Changing scene data  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the scene  
data to be changed. Then enter the characters using  
the numeric buttons and +/buttons. Press the  
numeric buttons while pressing down the SFT button  
to enter uppercase letters (A to J). A maximum of  
three characters can be entered.  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center  
cursor button.  
Or, do the procedure below to change the data.  
The selected character is entered.  
SCENE No. EDIT  
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
4 6 1,3  
2
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
scene data to be changed.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
To enter a space  
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
If you enter a wrong character  
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.  
Then re-enter the character.  
4-50  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To start the procedure over again  
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
To change a character  
Press the G button to move the cursor to the scene  
data to be changed. Then press the f or F button  
to move the insertion position.  
6 Press the [F10](SAVE/EXIT) button.  
The screen that was on before the scene data was  
entered is displayed again.  
2 Press the [F3] (COMMNT EDIT) button.  
To copy Scn data  
COMMENT EDIT  
Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is  
to be pasted. Then press the RCL button.  
The scene data from the line above is copied to the  
selected line.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
Changing Comment data  
SPÅCE LETTER  
To display comment data, press the [>] button several  
times.  
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
SCAN  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
COMMENT EDIT  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
B
No.  
Comment  
Noisy  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COMMNT  
EDIT  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
Pretty Good  
for NG Awards  
Goal  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
CHANGE  
DATA  
Celebration  
Å@Å@  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
INFO  
POINT EXIT  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
POINT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
To change Comment data  
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center  
cursor button. The selected character is entered.  
COMMENT EDIT  
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
4 6 1,3  
2
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
(Continued)  
comment to be changed.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.  
Write-protecting cue point data  
Up to 80 characters can be entered.  
Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line  
that is to be write-protected. Then press the [F7]  
(PROTECT) button. appears between the Time and  
Mrk columns to indicate that the time data, mark data,  
and recording starting point setting on that line are  
write-protected.  
Note  
If excessive comment data are entered, the input of  
cue point data may become disabled. To prevent  
this, press the [F8] (TAPE INFO) button to check  
the available memory.  
To enter a space  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
SCAN  
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
ENTRY  
POINT  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
If you enter a wrong character  
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.  
Then re-enter the character.  
No.  
Time  
Mrk  
NG  
KP  
OK  
OK  
NG  
OK  
IN  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:04:03  
00:04:04:03  
00:05:05:03  
00:06:06:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:01:01:03  
--:--:--:--  
00:03:03:03  
00:04:03:03  
00:05:04:03  
00:06:05:03  
COMMNT  
EDIT  
@
CHANGE  
DATA  
To start the procedure over again  
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
INFO  
POINT EXIT  
POINT  
To change a character  
Press the G button to move the cursor to the  
comment to be changed. Then press the f or F  
button to move the insertion position.  
To cancel a write-protection  
Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line  
for which write-protection is to be cancelled. Then  
press the [F7] (PROTECT) button. A message appears  
(in the control panel display) requesting confirmation  
of cancellation operation. Press the [F7] (PROTECT)  
button while pressing down the SFT button.  
If the entered text is longer than the  
comment box  
“p or p” appears to the left or right of the box.  
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.  
The screen that was on before the comment data  
was changed is displayed again.  
Prerolling to a cue point  
1 Press the [F1] (CUE SCAN) button repeatedly to  
specify the direction in which the cursor moves  
when the PREROLL button is pressed.  
Each press of the button changes the direction as  
follows: FWD (forward) n REW (reverse) n  
unspecified.  
FWD: Pressing the PREROLL button causes the  
cursor to move to the next line, and the VTR to  
preroll to the time code on that line. Invalid  
time codes are ignored.  
REW: Pressing the PREROLL button causes the  
cursor to move to the previous line, and the  
VTR to preroll to the time code on that line.  
Invalid time codes are ignored.  
2 Press the PREROLL button.  
4-52  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a new line  
Deleting a line  
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
Press the cursor button to move the cursor to the line to  
be deleted, and then press the [F5] (DEL POINT)  
button while pressing down the SFT button. The line  
is deleted and all proceeding lines move up by one.  
line that will be under the new line to be inserted.  
To move the cursor using the numeric  
buttons  
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or  
the recording starting point section in the TELE  
FILE menu display, enter the line number using  
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]  
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move  
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.  
Displaying other information saved to the  
memory label  
Press the [F8] (TAPE INFO) button. The TAPE  
INFORMATION window appears, showing other  
information concerning the videocassette.  
Note  
If the movement of the cursor () is not linked  
with the cursor buttons, the cursor () will not  
move when the cursor buttons are pressed.  
CH.COND  
TELE FILE  
CUE  
SCAN  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
TAPE INFORMATION  
TITL
ENTRY  
POINT  
ID: 001234567  
ADMIN: Kanrisha  
TITLE  
No.  
Scn  
A01  
A01  
A01  
A01  
B20  
B20  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
COMMNT  
EDIT  
MODEL: HDW-700  
SERIAL NUMBER:000123  
To link the cursor () with the cursor  
buttons  
WRITE PROTECT: ON  
TAPE THREAD COUNT: 123  
CHANGE  
DATA  
CUE POINT NUMBER:  
CONTROL MODE: panel  
5
Press the center cursor button. Each press of the  
button alternately links and unlinks the cursor ().  
SIZE: 1024  
USED: 234  
DEL  
MARK  
PRO-  
TECT  
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/  
INFO  
POINT EXIT  
POINT  
2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the  
SFT button.  
To close the window  
Press the [F8] (TAPE INFO) button again.  
A new line is inserted above the line where the  
cursor () is located, and the current time code is  
entered on the new line.  
To change ID or ADMIN data  
Moving a line  
2
Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Time  
data of the line to be moved. Then press the + or –  
button. Each press of the + button moves the line up,  
while each press of the button moves the line down.  
Note  
If you perform the procedure above while the cursor is  
on any other data other than the Time data, only the  
contents selected by the cursor will be moved. To  
move the entire line, be sure that the cursor is placed  
on the Time data.  
4 6 2,3  
1
1 Press the ALT/[F3] (ATTRIB EDIT) buttons.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4 CUE Menu  
To start the procedure over again  
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start agai.  
2 Press the G or g button to select ID (tape ID) or  
ADMIN (administrator), then press the ENTRY  
button.  
To change a character  
Press the G button to move the cursor to the data  
to be changed. Then press the f or F button to  
move the insertion position.  
CH.COND  
ALT+TELE FI  
FORMAT  
T-Fil  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
Rest 50%  
REC DATE[1998/02/10]  
UNDO  
ALL  
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]  
No.  
ATTRIB EDIT SELECT  
Scn  
A01  
A01  
A01  
A01  
B20  
B20  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:0
ATTR  
EDIT  
00:0
TITLE  
If entered text is longer than the ID or  
ADMIN box  
00:0
ID  
00:0
ADMIN  
00:0
COPY  
00:0
Press [ENTRY]to edit  
“p or p” appears to the left or right of the box.  
toCUE  
--:-
Press [CLR]to CANCEL  
T-Fil  
MODE  
WRITE  
PRTEC  
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.  
The screen that was on before the cut data was  
changed is displayed again.  
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.  
Id Edit  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
SPÅCE LETTER  
4 Press the[F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center  
cursor button.  
The selected character is entered.  
Id Edit  
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;  
$#%&,."\^_'/~  
' {}  
HD1D2CAM  
BÅCK  
SET  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
SPÅCE  
CÅNCEL  
SPÅCE LETTER  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.  
To enter a space  
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.  
If you enter a wrong character  
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.  
Then re-enter the character.  
4-54  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)  
For details on registration methods, see Section 4-1-3,  
The PF (Personal Function) 1 menu is used to register  
frequently used menu items.  
Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menuson page 4-3, and  
on restoring factory-set menu items, see Section 4-1-4,  
VTR Memory Bank Functionon page 4-4.  
When shipped from the factory, the PF1 menu contains  
the adjustment menu for video signals. If you later use  
the PF1 menu to register items from other menus, you  
can restore the PF1 menu to its original factory settings  
by recalling SETUP BANK F from the VTR memory  
banks.  
To activate the PF1 menu screen  
Press the PF1 button.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
PF1  
VIDEO  
IN  
L 113min  
SDI  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
SERVO  
REF  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
input  
ÅIN --:--:--:-- ÅOUT --:--:--:--  
IN --:--:--:-- OUT --:--:--:--  
MASTER  
(HD)  
prst  
Y
PB  
PR  
SETUP H PHAS FINE  
(HD)  
(HD)  
(HD)  
(HD)  
(HD)  
(HD)  
prst  
prst  
prst  
prst  
prst  
prst  
PF1 menu display  
PF1menu(factorysettings)  
Indication  
Settings  
Button  
Function  
VIDEO IN  
[F1]  
Selectstheinputvideosignal.  
SDI, SDTI  
Note  
TheSDTIselectionisoperativeonlywhenthe  
optionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoardisinstalled.  
[F2]  
[F4]  
Selectsthereferencesignalfor  
output.  
SERVO REF  
ext,input,auto  
AdjuststheY, PB,andP  
simultaneously.  
R
outputlevels prst, 0.0to141.3%  
MASTER LEVEL (HD)  
Y LEVEL (HD)  
prst, 0.0to141.3%  
[F5]  
[F6]  
[F7]  
[F8]  
[F9]  
[F10]  
AdjuststheYoutputlevel.  
AdjuststheP Boutputlevel.  
P
B
LEVEL (HD)  
LEVEL (HD)  
prst, 0.0to141.3%  
prst, 0.0to141.3%  
prst, 10.0 to +10.0  
prst, 128 to +127  
prst, 0 to 1024  
PR  
AdjuststheP  
R
outputlevel.  
SETUP LEVEL (HD)  
SYNC PHASE (HD)  
FINE (HD)  
Adjuststhesetuplevel.  
Adjuststhesyncphase.  
Fineadjustmentofthesyncphase  
ALT/[F1] MASTER LEVEL (D1)  
AdjuststheY,B-Y,andR-Youtput  
levelssimultaneously.  
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%  
ALT/[F2]  
AdjuststheYoutputlevel.  
AdjuststheB-Youtputlevel.  
AdjuststheR-Youtputlevel.  
Adjuststhevideolevel.  
Y LEVEL (D1)  
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%  
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%  
B-Y LEVEL (D1)  
ALT/[F3]  
ALT/[F4] R-Y LEVEL (D1)  
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%  
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%  
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%  
prst, 30 to +30  
ALT/[F5] VIDEO LEVEL (D2)  
ALT/[F6] CHROMA LEVEL (D2) Adjuststhechromalevel.  
ALT/[F7] HUE (D2)  
Adjuststhehue.  
SETUP LEVEL (D1/D2)  
ALT/[F8]  
Adjuststhesetuplevel.  
Adjuststhesyncphase.  
Fineadjustmentofthesyncphase  
prst, 0to+10.0  
prst, 128 to +127  
prst, 0 to 1024  
ALT/[F9] SYNC PHASE (SD)  
ALT/[F10] FINE (SD)  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)  
4-5-1 Selecting the Input Video  
Signal (VIDEO IN)  
4-5-3 Adjusting the Output Video  
Signal (MASTER LEVEL to FINE)  
Press the [F1] (VIDEO IN) button repeatedly to select  
the video signal to input.  
Adjusting the output video signal  
SDI:  
connector  
SDTI  
SDIvideosignalinputtotheHDSDIINPUT  
Follow the procedure below to adjust the output video  
signal.  
(OnlyiftheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoard  
isinstalled.): Dubbingsignal(270Mbps)inputto  
the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector.  
Notes  
The time codes to be recorded depend on the settings  
of the TC menu.  
1,3  
2
4-5-2 Selecting the Reference  
Signal (SERVO REF)  
Adjusting the output video signal  
Press the [F2] (SERVO REF) button to select the  
signal to be used as the reference signal for VTR  
operations.  
1 Press the function button ([F4] to [F10]) whose  
setting you wish to set.  
ext:  
TheservoreferencesignalisforcedtobeEXT.  
ThesignalfromtheHDSDIINPUTorSDTI  
The setting display section lights up.  
input:  
(OPTION) IN is used as the reference signal for  
VTR operations. The [F1] (VIDEO IN) button  
switches the video input signal.  
2 Change the numerical value by pressing the G or  
g button (or + or button).  
To change the value quickly, press the buttons  
while holding down the SFT button.  
auto:  
Duringrecordingoreditpreset,thesignalfrom  
the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN is  
used as a reference signal. In all other cases, the  
servo operates using the signal setting of item  
006.EXTERNAL REFERENCE select in the VTR  
SETUP menu. If the signal selected in  
006.EXTERNAL REFERENCE select is not  
present, the servo operates using an internal  
reference.  
To set the preset value  
Press the center cursor button.  
prst appears over the respective function button.  
3 Press the function button ([F4] to [F10]) after  
adjusting the numerical value.  
4-56  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the master output level (HD)  
Adjusting the sync phase (HD)  
Make this adjustment with the [F4] (MASTER  
LEVEL) button.  
Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of  
the VTR to the reference signal or when using a  
switcher or other device connected to another VTR to  
create special effects such as fading, wrapping, and  
dissolving.  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to  
the reference input, make this adjustment with the [F9]  
(SYNC PHASE) button.  
Adjusting the Y output level (HD)  
:tpsr  
u:evalNumaclire  
ranAge:duajebtsl  
0(0)  
Make this adjustment with the [F5] (Y LEVEL) button.  
pr:st  
128to+127  
1.4to+1.4H  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
Fine adjustment of the sync phase (HD)  
Adjusting the PB output level (HD)  
Make this adjustment with the [F10] (FINE) button.  
:tpsr  
u:eval Numalcire  
ranAge:duajtbesl  
0(0)  
Make this adjustment with the [F6] (PB LEVEL)  
button.  
0to1024  
0to323nsec  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
Adjusting the master output level (D1)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F1] (MASTER  
LEVEL) buttons.  
Adjusting the PR output level (HD)  
prst: 100% (4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
Make this adjustment with the [F7] (PR LEVEL)  
button.  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
Adjusting the Y output level (D1)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F2] (Y LEVEL)  
buttons.  
Adjusting the setup level (HD)  
pr:st  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
100%(4000H)  
Make this adjustment with the [F8] (SETUP LEVEL)  
button.  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
:ptsr  
0%(0)  
u:vealNumaclire  
range:Adauebtjsl  
10.0to+10.0  
10to+10%  
Adjusting the BY output level (D1)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F3] (BY  
LEVEL) buttons.  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)  
Adjusting the RY output level (D1)  
Adjusting the sync phase (D1/D2)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F4] (RY  
LEVEL) buttons.  
Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of  
the VTR to the reference signal or when using a  
switcher or other device connected to another VTR to  
create special effects such as fading, wrapping, and  
dissolving.  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to  
the reference input, make this adjustment with the  
ALT/[F9] (SYNC PHASE) buttons.  
Adjusting the video output level (D2)  
:tpsr  
u:evalNumaclire  
ranAge:duajebtsl  
0(0)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F5] (VIDEO  
LEVEL) buttons.  
128to+127  
0.5to+0.5H  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
Fine adjustment of the sync phase (D1/D2)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F10] (FINE)  
buttons.  
Adjusting the chroma output level (D2)  
:tpsr  
u:eval Numalcire  
ranAge:duajtbesl  
0(0)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F6] (CHROMA  
GAIN) buttons.  
0to1024  
0to296nsec  
pr:st  
100%(4000H)  
u:evalNumaclire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
0.0to141.3%  
to+3dB  
Adjusting the hue (D2)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F7] (HUE)  
buttons.  
:ptsr  
0°(0)  
u:eval Numalcire  
rangAe:duaebjtsl  
30to+30  
30°to+30°  
Adjusting the setup level (D2)  
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F8] (SETUP  
LEVEL) buttons.  
prs:t  
u:eval Numalcire  
raAnged:uajtbsel  
7.5IRE(7.5)  
0to+10.0  
0to+10.0IRE  
4-58  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)  
For details on registration methods, see Section 4-1-3,  
The PF2 menu is used to register frequently used menu  
items.  
Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menuson page 4-3, and  
on restoring factory-set menu items, see Section 4-1-4,  
VTR Memory Bank Functionon page 4-4.  
When shipped from the factory, the PF2 menu contains  
the adjustment menu for audio signals. If you later use  
the PF2 menu to register items from other menus, you  
can restore the PF2 menu to its original factory settings  
by recalling SETUP BANK F from the VTR memory  
banks.  
To activate the PF2 menu screen  
Press the PF2 button.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
PF2  
Å-IN  
CH1  
AES/EBU  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
Å-IN  
CH2  
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ  
IN --:--:--:--  
AES/EBU  
ÅIN --:--:--:-- ÅOUT --:--:--:--  
Å-IN  
CH3  
OUT --:--:--:--  
AES/EBU  
Å-IN  
CH4  
AES/EBU  
EMPHÅ-  
SIS  
MON-L MON-R  
SEL SEL  
off  
1____ _2___  
PF2 menu display  
PF2menu(factorysettings)  
Button Indication  
Function  
Settings  
[F1]  
[F2]  
[F3]  
[F4]  
A-IN CH1  
A-IN CH2  
A-IN CH3  
A-IN CH4  
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel1.  
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel2.  
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel3.  
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel4.  
SDI,AES/EBU,analg,[SDTI]  
Note  
Whenthedubbingsignalinputtothe  
SDTI(OPTION)INconnectoris  
selectedfortheinputvideosignal,the  
SDTIsignalinputtotheSDTI(OPTION)  
INconnectorisautomaticallyselected  
fortheinputaudiosignalaswell. The  
settingcannotbechanged.  
[F7]  
[F9]  
[F10]  
EMPHASIS  
MON-L SEL  
MON-R SEL  
Setstheemphasis.  
off,on  
SelectsthemonitoroutputsignalforchannelL.  
SelectsthemonitoroutputsignalforchannelR.  
Combination of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
Combination of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)  
4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input  
Signal (A-IN CH-1~CH4)  
4-6-3 Selecting the Monitor  
Output Signal (MON-L SEL/MON-  
R SEL)  
Function buttons [F1] (A-IN CH1) to [F4] (A-IN CH4)  
select the audio input signal for the various channels.  
The [F9] (MON-L SEL) and [F10] (MON-R SEL)  
buttons allow you to specify the audio channel to be  
output from the left and right MONITOR OUTPUT  
connectors, respectively.  
SDI:  
SelectstheaudiosignalinputthroughtheHD  
SDI INPUT connector.  
AES/EBU:  
Selectstheaudiosignalinputthroughthe  
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors.  
analg: Selectstheaudiosignalinputthroughthe  
AUDIO INPUT connectors.  
[SDTI] (OnlywhentheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTI  
1: Audiochannel1  
2: Audiochannel2  
3:  
Audiochannel3  
4: Audiochannel4  
Boardisinstalled.): WhentheSDTIsignalinput  
to the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is selected  
for the input video signal, the audio signal input  
to the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is  
automatically selected for the input audio signal as  
well. SDTI is displayed and can not be changed.  
5: Analogcuechannel  
When multiple channels are selected for a single  
connector, all of the numbers are displayed.  
Select the output signal to be monitored as follows:  
Making the setting  
Follow the steps below to set the monitor output  
signal.  
4-6-2 Setting Emphasis  
(EMPHASIS)  
1 Press the [F9] (MON-L SEL) or [F10] (MON-R  
SEL) button.  
To apply emphasis to a digital audio signal that has  
been converted from an analog input audio signal, set  
the [F7] (EMPHASIS) button to on.  
The setting display section lights up.  
2 Press numeric buttons 1 to 4 to select audio  
channels 1 to 4, or numeric button 5 for the analog  
cue channel.  
Example: Pressing numeric buttons 1 and 2 selects  
audio channels 1 and 2, leaving audio channels 3  
and 4, and the analog cue channel off.  
12...appears in the display.  
3 To set the entered audio channels, press the  
respective function button ([F9] or [F10]).  
4-60  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7 SET UP Menu  
In the SET UP menu, you can store and recall menu  
settings to and from the VTR memory banks and  
memory card, register items to the PF menu, and set  
items in the VTR SETUP menu and PANEL SETUP  
menu.  
To activate the SET UP menu  
Press the SET UP button.  
To change the SET UP menu page  
Press the ALT button.  
For details on storing and recalling data to or from the VTR  
memory banks or memory card, and registering items to the  
PF menus, see Section 4-1, Registering and Storing Menu  
Settingson page 4-1.  
$indicates that more than one menu page exists.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
L 113min  
SETUP  
VTR  
BÅNK  
MEMORY  
CÅRD  
VTR BÅNK: Copy data between  
[F1]  
current setup and 8 banks.  
[F2]MEMORY CÅRD: Copy data  
between VTR and memory card.  
[F4]PF1&2 ÅSSIGN: Åssign PF1/PF2  
menu function keys.  
PÅNEL SETUP: Panel setting  
VTR SETUP: VTR current setup  
[F5]  
[F6]  
PF1&2  
ÅSSIGN  
PÅNEL  
VTR  
REMOTE REMOTE  
SETUP SETUP  
9-PIN 50-PIN  
off off  
SET UP menu display  
SET UP menu  
Function  
Button  
[F1]  
Indication  
Settings  
VTRBANK  
See Section 4-1-4, “VTR Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.  
See Section 4-1-5, “Memory Card Function” on page 4-6.  
[F2]  
MEMORY CARD  
[F4]  
PF1&2ASSIGN See Section 4-1-3, “Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3.  
[F5]  
[F6]  
[F8]  
PANEL SETUP  
VTR SETUP  
See Section 4-7-2, “PANEL SETUP Menu” on page 4-63.  
See Section 4-7-1, “VTR SETUP Menu” on page 4-61.  
REMOTE 9-PIN SelectsremoteoperationthroughadeviceconnectedtotheREMOTE1-  
IN(9P)/OUT(9P)connectors.  
on,off  
on,off  
[F9]  
REMOTE 50-PIN Selectsremoteoperationusingadevice(optionalBKDW-509)  
connectedtothePARALLELI/O(50P)connector.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7 SET UP Menu  
Selecting remote operation mode  
When operating the VTR with an external device, set  
the [F8] (REMOTE 9-PIN) button or [F9] (REMOTE  
50-PIN) button to on.  
When the [F8] (REMOTE 9-PIN) button is set to  
on  
You can operate the VTR with a device connected to  
the REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors.  
When the [F9] (REMOTE 50-PIN) button is set  
to on  
You can operate the VTR with a device (optional  
BKDW-509) connected to the PARALLEL I/O(50P)  
connector.  
Note  
When operating the VTR through an external device,  
all of the tape operation and editing buttons are  
disabled, with the exception of the STOP and EJECT  
buttons. You may also set the VTR so that all buttons  
are enabled or disabled. Perform this setting through  
008. LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE of the VTR  
SETUP menu. You cannot, however, disable the menu  
and remote operation mode selection buttons.  
4-62  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu  
All menu items required for setting up the VTR  
operating conditions are displayed in the scrollable  
VTR SETUP menu.  
To activate the VTR SETUP menu  
Press the SET UP button, then press the [F6] (VTR  
SETUP) button.  
Items which are frequently used can be registered in  
the PF1/2 menus. Those items that can be registered in  
a PF menu are displayed in the scrollable PF1&2  
ASSIGN menu.  
For details on the VTR SETUP menu items, see the  
Appendix Menu Liston page A-15.  
For details on registering items to the PF1/2 menus, see  
Section 4-1-3, Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menuson  
page 4-3.  
VTR SETUP  
PREV  
CH.COND  
CÅTEG  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
HOURS COUNTER  
H01:OPE HOURS  
NEXT  
-
-
-
90  
10  
8
CÅTEG  
H02:DRUM HOURS  
H03:TAPE HOURS  
H04:THRED COUNT  
- 122  
H12:DRUM HOURS r -  
H13:TAPE HOURS r -  
H14:THRED COUNT r-  
21  
10  
93  
001:PRE READ  
002:CONFI  
- off  
- off  
- off  
- 4FD  
003:REC INH  
004:CAP LOCK  
CHÅNGE  
DÅTÅ  
CANCEL SÅVE/  
EXIT  
VTR SETUP menu display  
VTR SETUP menu  
Button Indication  
Function  
[F1]  
[F2]  
[F7]  
[F9]  
[F10]  
PREV CATEG  
NEXT CATEG  
CHANGEDATA  
CANCEL  
Movestothebeginningofthepreviouscategory.  
Movestothebeginningofthenextcategory.  
Changesthesetting.  
Cancelsthesettingoperation.  
SAVE/EXIT  
SetsthevalueandexitstheVTRSETUPmenu.  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7 SET UP Menu  
2 Press the [F7] (CHANGE DATA) button.  
Scrolling items in the VTR SETUP menu  
The window for changing settings appears.  
Press the Gand gto scroll the items in the VTR  
SETUP menu.  
To search the menu by category  
Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into  
categories according to type of settings they perform.  
VTR CONTROL  
PRE-READ  
001  
off  
Menu  
Category  
number  
CHÅNGE  
DÅTÅ  
SÅVE/  
EXIT  
H01~  
001~  
101~  
201~  
301~  
401~  
501~  
601~  
701~  
801~  
901~  
A01~  
T01~  
Itemsrelatedtothehoursmeter  
ItemsrelatedtoVTRoperations  
Itemsrelatedtooperationpanels  
Itemsrelatedtoremoteinterface  
Itemsrelatedtoediting  
3 Press the [F7] (CHANGE DATA) button or the G  
or gbutton repeatedly to select the new setting.  
When sub-items appear, change the setting as  
required with the Gor gbutton, then press the  
[F7] (CHANGE DATA) button repeatedly.  
Itemsrelatedtoprerolling  
Itemsrelatedtorecordingprotection  
Itemsrelatedtothetimecodegenerator  
Itemsrelatedtothevideocontrol  
Itemsrelatedtotheaudiocontrol  
Itemsrelatedtodigitalprocess  
Itemsrelatedtopulldowncontrol  
Other  
4 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.  
The new value is set and the window for changing  
settings disappears.  
5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to change more settings.  
Pressing the [F1] (PREV CATEG) button selects the  
first item of the previous category.  
Pressing the [F2] (NEXT CATEG) button selects the  
first item of the next category.  
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button again.  
The new settings are saved and the SETUP menu  
display appears again.  
Changing settings  
2,3 4,6 1  
Changing settings  
1 Press the Gor gbutton to move the cursor (z)  
to the item to be changed.  
4-64  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu  
To activate the PANEL SETUP menu  
Press the SET UP button, then press the [F5] (PANEL  
SETUP) button.  
The PANEL SETUP menu is used to set the operation  
conditions of the upper and lower control panels.  
REMAIN-T CH.COND  
PÅNEL SETUP  
KEYINH  
off  
L 113min  
KEY  
ÅLÅRM SCREEN  
EXIT  
BEEP  
BEEP  
SÅVER  
off  
high  
10min  
PANEL SETUP menu display  
PANELSETUPmenu  
Button  
[F1]  
Indication  
KEYINH  
Function  
Settings  
Disablesallbuttonoperations.  
Setsthekeyboardsound.  
Setsthealarm.  
on,off  
[F6]  
KEYBEEP  
ALARMBEEP  
SCREEN SAVER  
EXIT  
high,low,off  
high,low,off  
3min,10min,60min,off  
[F7]  
[F8]  
Setsthescreen-saver.  
ExitsthePANELSETUPmenu.  
[F10]  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7 SET UP Menu  
Disabling the upper and lower control  
panel buttons  
Set the [F1] (KEYINH) button to on.  
You can select buttons to be disabled through 110.  
KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE AREA in the  
VTR SETUP menu.  
Setting the keyboard sound  
Press the [F6] (KEY BEEP) button repeatedly.  
high: The keyboard sound is loud.  
low: The keyboard sound is weak.  
off: The keyboard sound is off.  
Setting the alarm  
Press the [F7] (ALARM BEEP) button repeatedly.  
high: The alarm sound is loud.  
low: The alarm sound is weak.  
off: The alarm sound is off.  
Setting the elapsed time until screen-  
saver activated time  
Press the [F8] (SCREEN SAVER) button repeatedly.  
3min: The screen-saver goes on 3 minutes after the  
last button operation.  
10min: The screen-saver goes on 10 minutes after  
the last button operation.  
60min: The screen-saver goes on 60 minutes after  
the last button operation.  
off: The screen-saver function is off.  
4-66  
Chapter 4 Menu Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Preparing for Recording  
5-1-1 Setting Switches and Menus  
For details, refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses.  
Before recording, set the switches and menus as shown  
in the diagram below.  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons:  
Audio channels to be recorded (page 5-2)  
REC level controls: Reference level or  
appropriate recording level (page 5-3)  
Indicators: Check the REFERENCE signal.  
REMOTE buttons: None of these  
buttons light up.  
POWER switch: ON  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
Menu settings  
ALT/[F2] (REC INH) buttons in the HOME menu: off  
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: Select the time data to be displayed.  
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu: int-LTC, int-VITC, ext-LTC, ext-VITC (see page 4-25)  
[F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu: regene, prst, auto (see page 4-25)  
Setting switches and menus  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Preparing for Recording  
5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals  
Note  
If item 701.VIDEO INPUT select in the VTR SETUP  
menu is set to SDTI, the audio input signal on the  
SDTI (OPTION) IN connector will automatically be  
used as the input audio signal and AUDIO INPUT/  
MONITOR SELECT buttons become unlit. The SDTI  
setting is operative only when the optional HKDV-  
506A SDTI Board is installed.  
This section describes how to select the audio signals  
for input and monitoring.  
Selecting the audio input signals  
Press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select  
the audio input signal and channels.  
Selecting audio signals to be monitored  
Press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select  
the audio signals output to the PHONES jack and the  
MONITOR OUTPUT L and R connectors.  
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
2
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
2
Selecting the audio input signals  
1 Press the INPUT SELECT button so that it lights  
up.  
1
The AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
button(s) light(s) up to indicate the audio input  
signal type and the currently selected audio  
channel.  
Selecting audio signals to be monitored  
1 Press the MONITOR SELECT button so that it  
lights up.  
The AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
button(s) light(s) up to indicate the audio input  
signal type and the channel(s) being monitored.  
2 Select the signals to be input and the channels by  
pressing the following buttons:  
HD SDI CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio  
input through HD SDI INPUT connector.  
(Channels 1 through 4)  
AES/EBU CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio  
channels 1 to 4 input through the AUDIO INPUT  
(AES/EBU) connectors.  
ANALOG CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio  
channels 1 to 4 through the AUDIO INPUT  
connectors.  
2 Press the button(s) for the audio signal and the  
channel(s) to be output to the PHONES jack and  
the MONITOR OUTPUT L and/or R connector(s).  
This setting can also be made in the VTR SETUP  
menu using items 807.AUDIO MONITOR-L  
select and 808.AUDIO MONITOR-R select.  
To adjust the audio output level of the  
PHONES jack  
Rotate the PHONES level control on the upper control  
panel.  
This setting can also be made in the VTR SETUP  
menu using items 802.AUDIO INPUT SELECT  
channel CH-1 through 805.AUDIO INPUT select  
CH-4.  
5-2  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To adjust the audio output level of the  
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors  
You can make an initial settings to allow the audio  
output level of the MONITOR OUTPUT connector to  
be adjusted with the PHONES level control on the  
upper control panel.  
5-1-3 Adjusting the Audio  
Recording Level  
Adjusting the recording level  
Recording with the reference level  
For more information, refer to the supplied Maintenance  
Manual.  
If the REC level controls on the upper control panel  
are pushed in, audio signals are recorded at the  
reference level (0 dB reference level indicated in the  
audio level meters for +4 dBm input).  
Selecting non-audio data as the audio  
input signal  
Recording with the specific recording level  
Pull out the REC level controls for the appropriate  
channels and rotate them so that the audio level meters  
indicate approximately 0 dB for the average audio  
signal input level.  
Do the procedure below to select non-audio data such  
as a Dolby1) E or Dolby Digital (AC-32)) signal as the  
audio input signal.  
1 Use item 819.NO AUDIO MODE Select and item  
820.NON AUDIO Channel Select to select the  
audio input signal.  
REC level controls  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
INPUT SELECT button  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
Adjusting the recording level  
The button of the selected channel flashes.  
Selecting the display range of the audio  
level meters  
2 Press the INPUT SELECT button and verify that  
the flashing AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
button matches the channel selected in step 1.  
You can switch the range of audio level meters display  
by pressing the DISPLAY FULL/FINE button on the  
upper control panel.  
Notes  
When you select non-audio data as the audio input  
signal:  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
The audio input signal cannot be switched.  
The OVERindication on the audio level meters  
flashes.  
Analog audio output to the main line, monitor, and  
the headphones are muted.  
The recording level cannot be adjusted using the REC  
level controls.  
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button  
Selecting the display range of the audio level meters  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
2) AC-3 is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3  
5-1 Preparing for Recording  
FULL mode: The meter range is 60 to 0 dB or 40  
to +20 dB.  
5-1-5 Recording Analog Audio  
FINE mode: The meter scale is enlarged, and the  
signal level is indicated in 0.25 dB steps, with the  
reference marker indicated by a lit LED in the  
middle of each meter.  
Recording with emphasis  
You can emphasize analog audio signals that are  
recorded from the AUDIO INPUT connectors. When  
the emphasis is removed during playback, high  
frequency noise is effectively eliminated without  
affecting the original signal.  
The display range of the audio level meters in FULL  
mode can be set with 814.LEVEL METER SCALE in  
the VTR SETUP menu.  
To use the emphasis function, set item 806.AUDIO  
EMPHASIS in the VTR SETUP menu to on.  
During playback, regardless of this setting, only  
signals to which emphasis have been applied are  
automatically de-emphasized.  
5-1-4 Simultaneously Monitoring  
Playback of Video and Audio  
Signals Being Recorded  
Monitoring signals being recorded  
Using the 017.PB/EE SELECT MENU settings, the  
audio and video signals currently being recorded can  
be simultaneously checked.  
To check video and audio signals during  
recording  
In the VTR SETUP menu, set 017.PB/EE SELECT  
MENU to PB/PB. Both audio and video playback  
signals are output.  
To check video and audio signals during  
editing  
In the VTR SETUP menu, set 017.PB/EE SELECT  
MENU to PB/PB. Both audio and video playback  
signals are output.  
Monitoring previously recorded video and  
audio signals while recording  
To monitor previously recorded audio and video  
signals while recording (preread function), press the  
ALT button in the HOME menu, then press the [F1]  
(PRE READ) button.  
For details, see Section 4-2-4, Preread Setting (PRE  
READ)on page 4-17.  
5-4  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2 Recording  
To record, follow the procedure below.  
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
3 2  
Recording  
1 Check that the REC INHIBIT indicator is off, then  
insert a cassette.  
For details on inserting a cassette, see Section 3-3-2,  
Inserting and Ejecting Cassetteson page 3-8.  
2 Press the PLAY button while holding down the  
REC button.  
Recording starts and the SERVO indicator lights  
up to indicate that the servo is locked.  
3 Press the STOP button to stop recording.  
If the recording continues to the end of the  
tape  
If item 407. AUTO REWIND in the VTR SETUP  
menu is set to ON, then the tape automatically rewinds  
to the beginning and stops.  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
5-3 Preparing for Playback  
5-3-1 Setting Switches and Menus  
Before starting playback, set the switches and menus  
as shown in the diagram below.  
For details, refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses.  
POWER switch: ON  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons:  
Audio channels to be monitored (page 5-2)  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
PB level controls:  
Playback level  
REMOTE buttons: None of  
these buttons light up.  
Menu settings  
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: Select the time data to be displayed.  
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu: int-LTC, int-VITC, ext-LTC, ext-VITC (see page 4-25)  
[F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu: regene, prst, auto (see page 4-25)  
Setting switches and menus  
To adjust the audio playback level  
manually  
5-3-2 Adjusting the Audio  
Playback Level  
Pull and rotate the PB level control for the  
corresponding channel.  
If the PB level controls on the upper control panel are  
pushed in, audio signals are output at the factory-set  
level (+4 dBm output for signals recorded at the 0 dB  
reference level).  
For details on changing the factory-set reference output  
level, refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual.  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
PB level controls  
To adjust the audio playback level manually  
5-6  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When 13:9 is selected  
5-3-3 Selecting the HD-SD  
Conversion Mode  
(when HKDV-501A is installed)  
HD  
SD  
/
When the optional HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter  
Board is installed in the HDW-F500, the conversion  
mode can be selected with setting the VTR SETUP  
menu 754. DOWNCONVERTER MODE.  
The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is  
compressed, changing the aspect ratio to 13:9.  
Edge crop (CROP)  
Squeeze mode (SQUEEZE)  
HD  
SD  
HD  
SD  
/
/
,
One-fourth of the HD screen on each side is cut off.  
The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is  
compressed, changing the aspect ratio to 13:9.  
Horizontal adjustment of the edge cropping  
Adjust the 766.H CROP POSITION setting in VTR  
SETUP menu.  
Letter box mode (LETTER BOX)  
When the letter box mode is selected, you can select  
one of the following conversion methods through item  
778.LETTER BOX MODE in the VTR SETUP menu.  
When 16:9 is selected  
HD  
SD  
/
The signal is compressed, maintaining an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
When 14:9 is selected  
HD  
SD  
/
The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is  
compressed, changing the aspect ratio to 14:9.  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3 Preparing for Playback  
4 Press the [F9](SYSTEM MENU) button.  
5-3-4 Selecting the Conversion  
Mode of the Effective Scanning Line  
Number (when HKDV-502 is installed)  
CH.COND  
SYSTEM MENU  
ACTIVE  
LINE  
off  
SYSTEM MENU  
SYSTEM  
FREQ  
[F1]1080  
[F2]SYSTEM FREQUENCY  
MODE7 59.94i  
[F3]SDI OUT.  
1035  
(CONVERT)  
When the optional HKDV-502 HD Line Converter  
Board is installed in the HDW-F500, to select the  
conversion mode, follow the procedure below.  
MODE7  
( D1 / D2 )  
D-CONV  
SDI  
[F4]META DATA(FILM/C.C./USER)  
[F8]Cancel  
D1  
[F9]Execute of Reset VTR System.  
with conditions  
META  
DATA  
STOP & not STANDBY  
EJECT Tape.  
FILM  
1 Press the MAINTENANCE switch using the tip of  
CANCEL EXEC  
EXIT  
a small pointed object.  
CH.COND  
MAINTE INFO  
ROM  
VER  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
5 Press the [F1](ACTIVE LINE) button to select the  
conversion mode.  
MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY  
ERR  
LOG  
OPERATION  
529HOURS  
34HOURS[  
20HOURS[  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE TRAVEL  
26H]  
16H]  
Pressing the button cycles the settings from 1035,  
1080, off. off is used to activate the function to  
improve the vertical resolution during slow-motion  
playback.  
1035: Convert the effective scanning line number  
from 1080 to 1035.  
TH
i
9H]  
OPERATION INFO  
FREQ:  
59.94i  
LINE:1080 1035(CONV)  
OPTION  
INFO  
MAINTE  
EXEC  
EXIT  
1080: Convert the effective scanning line number  
from 1035 to 1080.  
2 Press the [F8](MAINTE EXEC) button while  
holding down the SFT button.  
6 Press the [F9](EXEC).  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
CH.COND  
MAINTENANCE  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MAINTENANCE  
ROM  
MAINT  
To cancel the execution  
Press the [F8](CANCEL) button.  
OPERATION  
529HOURS  
34HOURS[  
20HOURS[  
780TIMES[  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE TRAVEL  
THREADING  
26H]  
16H]  
PANEL  
MAINT  
449H]  
7 Press the [F9](EXEC).  
SERVO  
CHECK  
The HDW-F500 is restarted automatically.  
DT/SAT  
CHECK  
RF  
A/V  
OTHERS  
EXIT  
CHECK CHECK CHECK  
8 Press the SET UP button.  
The VTR SETUP menu appears in the display.  
3 Press the [F9](OTHERS CHECK) button.  
CH.COND  
OTHERS CHK  
NVRAM  
CTL  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
OTHERS CHECK  
MEMORY  
CHECK  
RS232C  
STATUS  
M-HEAD  
ROOM  
HOURS PAPA-I PAPA-O  
METER SETUP SETUP  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
EXIT  
5-8  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Select the conversion mode in the VTR SETUP  
5-3-5 Improving the Vertical  
Resolution during Slow-Motion  
Playback (when HKDV-502 is  
installed)  
menu below.  
When 1035 is selected in the procedure 5.  
Select the conversion mode using the 730.ACTIVE  
LINE 1035 CONVERT MODE setting in the VTR  
SETUP menu.  
1080÷1035(CONV): Convert the effective  
scanning line number from 1080 to 1035  
preserving the aspect ratio of the image.  
When the optional HKDV-502 HD Line Converter  
Board is installed in the HDW-F500, to activate the  
function to improve the vertical resolution during  
slow-motion playback, follow the procedure below.  
1 Press the MAINTENANCE switch using the tip of  
a small pointed object.  
1080  
1035  
CH.COND  
MAINTE INFO  
ROM  
VER  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY  
ERR  
LOG  
1080÷1035(CROP): Convert the effective  
scanning line number from 1080 to 1035. The  
four sides of the image are cropped, then it is  
horizontally expanded.  
OPERATION  
529HOURS  
34HOURS[  
20HOURS[  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE TRAVEL  
26H]  
16H]  
TH
i
9H]  
OPERATION INFO  
FREQ:  
59.94i  
LINE:1080 1035(CONV)  
OPTION  
INFO  
MAINTE  
EXEC  
EXIT  
1080  
1035  
1920  
1920  
samples  
samples  
2 Press the [F8](MAINTE EXEC) button while  
holding down the SFT button.  
When 1080 is selected in the procedure 5.  
Select the conversion mode using the 731.ACTIVE  
LINE 1080 CONVERT MODE setting in the VTR  
SETUP menu.  
CH.COND  
MAINTENANCE  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
MAINTENANCE  
ROM  
MAINT  
1035÷1080(CONV): Convert the effective  
scanning line number from 1035 to 1080  
preserving the aspect ratio of the image.  
OPERATION  
529HOURS  
34HOURS[  
20HOURS[  
780TIMES[  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE TRAVEL  
THREADING  
26H]  
16H]  
PANEL  
MAINT  
449H]  
SERVO  
CHECK  
DT/SAT  
CHECK  
RF  
A/V  
OTHERS  
EXIT  
CHECK CHECK CHECK  
1035  
1080  
3 Press the [F9](OTHERS CHECK) button.  
1035÷1080(PANEL): Convert the effective  
scanning line number from 1035 to 1080. The  
1035 lines of the image are inserted into the  
1035 lines of 1080 lines, then it is horizontally  
compressed.  
CH.COND  
OTHERS CHK  
NVRAM  
CTL  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
OTHERS CHECK  
MEMORY  
CHECK  
RS232C  
STATUS  
M-HEAD  
ROOM  
1035  
1080  
1035  
HOURS PAPA-I PAPA-O  
METER SETUP SETUP  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
EXIT  
(Continued)  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
5-3 Preparing for Playback  
4 Press the [F9](SYSTEM MENU) button.  
CH.COND  
SYSTEM MENU  
ACTIVE  
LINE  
off  
SYSTEM MENU  
SYSTEM  
FREQ  
[F1]1080  
[F2]SYSTEM FREQUENCY  
MODE7 59.94i  
[F3]SDI OUT.  
1035  
(CONVERT)  
MODE7  
( D1 / D2 )  
D-CONV  
SDI  
[F4]META DATA(FILM/C.C./USER)  
[F8]Cancel  
D1  
[F9]Execute of Reset VTR System.  
with conditions  
META  
DATA  
STOP & not STANDBY  
EJECT Tape.  
FILM  
CANCEL EXEC  
EXIT  
5 Press the [F1](ACTIVE LINE) button to select off.  
Pressing the button cycles the settings from 1035,  
1080, off.  
1035 and 1080 are used to activate the function to  
convert the effective scanning line number.  
6 Press the [F9](EXEC).  
A message asking you to confirm the operation  
appears in the display.  
To cancel the execution  
Press the [F8](CANCEL) button.  
7 Press the [F9](EXEC).  
The HDW-F500 is restarted automatically.  
8 Press the SET UP button.  
The VTR SETUP menu appears in the display.  
9 Select on in the 732.SLOW PROCESS MODE of  
the VTR SETUP menu.  
on: Improve the vertical resolution during slow-  
motion playback.  
off: Do not improve the vertical resolution during  
slow-motion playback.  
5-10  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4 Playback  
There are four types of playback:  
Normal-speed playback  
5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback  
Jog/Shuttle/Variable mode playback  
Capstan override playback  
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback  
In Jog/Shuttle/Variable modes, you can change the  
playback speed as follows:  
Jogmode: The playback speed corresponds to the  
rotational speed of the search dial, ranging from  
1 to +1 or 2 to +2 times normal playback speed.  
(The speed setting can be changed in the VTR  
SETUP menu using item 107.JOG DIAL  
RESPONSE.)  
Shuttle mode: The playback speed corresponds to  
the angle of rotation of the search dial. The  
playback speed is different depending on the  
frame frequency of the unit. The search dial  
clicks at the positions for still-picture and ±10  
times normal speed playback.  
5-4-1 Normal-Speed Playback  
Follow the procedure below to play back at normal  
speed.  
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
Frame frequency Playback speed  
23.98/24 Hz  
25 Hz  
Ranging from 60 to +60  
Ranging from 58 to +58  
Ranging from 50 to +50  
29.97/30 Hz  
Variable mode: Playback speed is 1 times normal  
speed when the search dial is rotated fully  
counterclockwise, and +2 times normal speed  
when rotated clockwise.  
32  
Normal-speed playback  
1 Insert a cassette.  
For details on inserting a cassette, see Section 3-3-2,  
Inserting and Ejecting Cassetteson page 3-8.  
2 Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts and the SERVO indicator lights up  
to indicate that the servo is locked.  
3 Press the STOP button to stop playback.  
If playback continues to the end of the tape  
If item 407. AUTO REWIND in the VTR SETUP  
menu is set to ON, then the tape automatically rewinds  
to the beginning and stops.  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-11  
5-4 Playback  
Jog mode playback  
Shuttle mode playback  
Follow the procedure below to play back in jog mode.  
Follow the procedure below to play back in shuttle  
mode.  
1
1
1,2,3  
3
1,2,3  
Jog mode playback  
Shuttle mode playback  
1
Press the JOG button so that the JOG button lights up.  
The p indicator lights up and the VTR enters still-  
picture mode.  
1 Press the SHUTTLE button so that the SHUTTLE  
button lights up.  
The pindicator lights up and the VTR enters still-  
picture mode.  
2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback  
direction and to the desired angle.  
2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback  
direction and set the angle of rotation as required  
to obtain the desired playback speed.  
The tape is played back slowly, at a speed  
corresponding to the rotational speed of the search  
dial. A direction indicator (or ) lights up to  
indicate the direction of playback.  
Shuttle mode  
3 Stop rotating the search dial to stop jog mode  
playback.  
The indicator lights up.  
(60/58/50)  
(+60/+58/+50)  
Note  
You can change the search dial mode selection so that  
pressing the search dial switches the VTR between jog  
and shuttle modes.  
The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds  
to the angle of the search dial. A direction  
indicator (or ) lights up to indicate the  
direction of playback.  
For details on switching the search dial functions, refer to  
the supplied Mainenance Manual.  
The search dial clicks at the positions for still-  
picture and ±10 times normal-speed playback.  
3 Set the search dial to center position for still-  
picture, or press the STOP button to stop shuttle  
mode playback.  
5-12  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To return to normal-speed playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds  
to the angle of the search dial. A direction  
indicator (or ) lights up to indicate the  
direction of playback.  
The search dial clicks at the positions for still-  
picture and normal-speed playback.  
Note  
The audio signal output status is specified by the  
following settings of 017. PB/EE SELECT MENU in  
the VTR SETUP menu.  
EE: The input audio is output.  
MU: The audio output is muted.  
PB: The playback audio signal is output for playback  
speeds of 1 to +2 times normal speed, and is  
muted for playback speeds of more than 1 or +2  
times normal speed.  
3 Set the search dial to center position for still-  
picture, or press the STOP button to stop variable  
mode playback.  
To return to normal-speed playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
To alternate between normal-speed playback  
and variable mode playback  
Variable mode playback  
After you have set the search dial to the angle that  
corresponds to the desired playback speed, pressing  
the PLAY button or VAR button selects normal-speed  
playback or variable mode playback, respectively.  
To stop or start variable mode playback, press the  
STOP button or VAR button, respectively.  
Follow the procedure below to play back in variable  
mode.  
1
The VTR is factory set so that pressing the JOG,  
SHUTTLE, or VAR button is required in order to enter  
variable-speed playback mode. To change this setting,  
use item 101. SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  
ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu.  
3
2,3  
Variable mode playback  
1 Press the VAR button so that it lights up.  
The indicator lights up and the VTR enters still-  
VAR mode.  
2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback  
direction and set the angle of rotation as required  
to achieve the desired playback speed.  
Variable mode  
1  
+2  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-13  
5-4 Playback  
5-4-3 Capstan Override Playback  
5-4-4 DMC Playback  
When playing back the same program on two VTRs,  
you can adjust the playback phases of the two VTRs so  
that they are synchronized.  
There are two ways to make this adjustment:  
(A) Using the search dial  
Overview of DMC playback  
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback allows you  
to vary the playback speed in variable mode (in the DT  
playback range between 1 and +2 times normal  
speed) for certain sections of the tape, then store the  
specified speed in memory for later playback.  
(B) Using the +/buttons  
Note  
For example, during a live broadcast of a sporting  
event, you can set the start and end points of important  
scenes while recording, and immediately play back  
and broadcast those scenes using DMC playback.  
When using method (A), change the system setup so  
that jog/shuttle mode playback is inhibited even when  
the search dial is rotated. Doing so prevents the VTR  
from accidentally entering jog/shuttle mode during  
capstan override playback. Make this setting through  
101. SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE in  
the VTR SETUP menu.  
Storing playback speeds in memory  
Follow the procedure below to store playback speeds  
in memory.  
1(B)  
5
4,6  
1,2  
1(A)  
Capstan override playback  
1
2
3,7  
1 Use either method (A) or (B).  
(A)Rotate the search dial while holding down the  
PLAY button to adjust the playback speed.  
The adjustment range is ±15% (in steps of 1%)  
of the normal playback speed.  
Storing playback speeds in memory  
1 In HOME menu, press the ALT button, then press  
the[F7]  
display.  
(DMC)buttontolightupDMConthe  
(B)Press the + or button while holding down the  
PLAY button to adjust the playback speed.  
Every time the + or button is pressed, the  
speed changes using the field number set in the  
VTR SETUP menu under item 004.CAPSTAN  
LOCK select.  
2 Set a start point during recording or on a  
previously recorded tape by simultaneously  
pressing the ENTRY button and the IN button.  
During playback at increased or decreased speed,  
the SERVO indicator goes off since the servo is  
not locked (capstan override).  
3 Press the STOP button to enter stop mode.  
4 Rotate the search dial to select the initial playback  
speed.  
2 Release the PLAY button after you have finished  
adjusting the phase.  
The selected speeds are shown in the time data  
display window in the menu display.  
The VTR returns to normal-speed playback and the  
SERVO indicator lights up.  
5-14  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performing DMC playback  
Note  
If the 101.SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  
ENABLE setting in the VTR SETUP menu is set  
to dial direct, initial speed settings cannot be made.  
Change the 101.SELECTION FOR SEARCH  
DIAL ENABLE setting to via search key.  
There are two methods of starting DMC playback.  
Starting playback at the on-air cue from the on-air  
start point  
Starting playback immediately after prerolling  
Note  
5 Press the PREROLL button and PREVIEW button  
simultaneously.  
To avoid operation errors, we recommend that you use  
the VTR alone when performing DMC playback.  
The tape is prerolled and played back at the initial  
speed from the preroll point to the speed variation  
start point. The moment the tape passes the speed  
variation start point, the MEMORY indicator in the  
display starts flashing.  
1 2  
(The pindicator appears in the time data display  
window, indicating that tape speed memorization  
in DMC mode is active.)  
6 Rotate the search dial to the position for the  
desired playback speed.  
The speed variation is stored in memory while the  
MEMORY indicator is flashing.  
Performing DMC playback  
7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape.  
To start playback at the on-air cue from the  
on-air start point  
If the MEMORY indicator frashes before the  
tape reaches the speed variation end point  
Memory has been exceeded and the VTR cannot store  
any more data for playback speed variations.  
1 Press the PREROLL button.  
The PREROLL button lights up and the tape is  
cued up to the on-air start point.  
Notes on the p indicator and the MEMORY  
indicator  
2 Press the PREVIEW button at the moment the on-  
air cue is given.  
The pindicator shows that the tape speed  
memorization in DMC mode is taking place.  
The MEMORY indicator flashes during playback  
speed memorization, then stays lit continuously when  
memorization of the playback speed has been  
completed.  
The PREVIEW button lights up. When the tape  
passes the speed variation start point, DMC  
playback starts and continues at the speed(s) stored  
in memory. When the tape passes the speed  
variation end point, normal-speed playback starts  
and the tape stops at the on-air end point.  
To start playback immediately after prerolling  
Press the PREVIEW button.  
The PREVIEW button lights up. When the tape passes  
the speed variation start point, DMC playback starts  
and continues at the speed(s) stored in memory. When  
the tape passes the speed variation end point, normal-  
speed playback resumes.  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-15  
5-4 Playback  
To stop the tape during DMC playback  
Press the STOP button.  
5-4-6 Output of Pull Down Signal  
The explanation of pull down signal output for  
playback is given below.  
To exit DMC playback mode  
Press the ALT/[F7] (DMC) button in HOME menu to  
go off DMC on the display.  
Time code multiplexed to pull down signal  
output  
During DMC playback, the tape runs as shown in the  
diagram below.  
• The value of the time code multiplexed to pull down  
HD SDI output signal is determined by the time code  
preset using the PDPSET MENU in the TC menu and  
converted into 30-frame time code.  
Speed variation  
end point  
$
Preroll time ×  
initial speed  
$
IN point  
$
Note  
Press the PREVIEW button.  
LTC output of this unit is always 24-frame time code  
which is output from the main output line of this unit.  
• When this unit is operated in 24F mode, time code  
data of the user’s bits area is not included in the pull  
down signal output. The time code value before  
conversion (24F mode) and sequence information of  
conversion contained in user’s bits data are  
multiplexed to the HD SDI output signal. The  
following four bits are used for the sequence  
information to display 0 to 9 repeatedly.  
MSB: The first bit of the tens digit of the hour  
The second bit of the tens digit of the hour  
Tape runs at  
initial speed  
Playback mode  
using the  
memorized speed  
Playback at  
normal speed  
The first bit of the tens digit of the minute  
DMC playback  
LSB: The first bit of the tens digit of the second  
When the sequence information is masked, the  
remaining contents of user’s bits data are the same as  
the time code value before conversion (24F mode).  
5-4-5 Playing Back Non-audio  
Data  
Note  
Since user’s bits data multiplexed to the down-  
converted output signal are updated frame by frame,  
24-frame time code and sequence information of the  
down-converted output signal differs from those  
multiplexed to the HD output signal.  
Non-audio data recorded on a tape is detected  
automatically and played back.  
Note  
When non-audio data is being played back:  
• The “OVER” indication on the audio level meters  
flashes.  
• Analog audio output to the main line, monitor, and  
the headphones are muted.  
Time code area  
30F TC  
User’s bits area (HD)  
24F TC + sequence information  
A frame  
00:00:00:00  
00:00:00:00  
00:00:00:01  
00:00:00:01  
00:00:00:02  
00:00:00:02  
00:00:00:03  
00:00:00:03  
00:00:00:04  
00:00:00:00  
00:00:80:00  
00:80:00:01  
00:80:80:01  
40:00:00:01  
40:00:80:02  
40:80:00:02  
40:80:80:03  
80:00:00:03  
80:00:80:03  
00:00:00:04  
00:00:80:04  
*
*
*
*
*
*
• The playback level cannot be adjusted using the PB  
audio output level controls.  
Cycle of  
conversion  
00:00:00:04  
00:00:00:05  
00:00:00:05  
A frame  
5-16  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phase lock for the HD reference signal  
(23.98PsF) and 525 black burst signal  
(59.94i mode)  
Output delay  
When an optional HKDV-507 HD Pull Down Board is  
installed, or when an optional HKDV-507D HD Pull  
Down Board is installed and item A05. PD EXT SD  
REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to  
offor lock1,the phase of the output delay for  
conversion is as illustrated below.  
However, when the HKDV-507D board is installed  
and item A05 is set to lock1,pull down output is  
locked to the external reference signal (525 black burst  
signal).  
When an optional HKDV-507D HD Pull Down Board  
is installed and item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK  
MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to lock1or  
lock2to lock the pull down output signal to the  
external reference signal, the phase of the external  
reference signals for 24F mode and 30F mode should  
be locked as illustrated below.  
Line 1  
HD SDI  
or  
1 frame  
23.976PsF  
external HD Ref.  
A
B
C
D
A
B
Exetrnal SD Ref.  
Line 4 ± 10 lines  
1 frame  
59.94i  
A frame: No.2  
A frame: No.1  
A frame: No.0  
A frame: No.3  
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2  
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2  
Tri-level sync signal  
(1125/59.94i)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2  
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2  
1122 1123 1124 1125  
Variable  
3.58 black burst signal  
delay  
(525/59/94i)  
2
3
4
5
6
Pull down audio output  
Pull down output phase lock  
Audio signal multiplexed to the pull down HD SDI  
output signal is delayed so that the audio signal and the  
video signal are equal in phase as considering the  
video signal delay due to video signal processing. The  
pulled down and down-converted SDI output signal is  
also multiplexed with the delayed audio signal.  
When an optional HKDV-507D HD Pull Down Board  
is installed and item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK  
MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to lock2,  
the phase of the pull dowm otuput signal can be locked  
as illustrated below.  
Note  
23.976PsF  
The AES/EBU or analog audio output signal and 24-  
frame video output signal (the main output line of this  
unit) are equal in phase.  
A
B
C
D
A
B
59.94i  
C1 D2 D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2  
2 frames delay  
(59.94i)  
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
Steps in automatic editing  
6-1-1 Overview of Automatic  
Editing  
The sequence of steps that are taken to do automatic  
editing with two VTRs is as follows:  
Automatic edit modes  
Select the edit mode (page 6-3).  
.
The VTR provides the following two modes for  
automatic editing:  
Set edit points for the recorder and player VTR  
(page 6-3).  
.
Assemble mode  
Preview the edit section (page 6-9).  
New scenes are added to the end of previously  
recorded scenes.  
CTL signals, time codes, video and audio signals on  
tape in the player are recorded onto tape in the  
recorder VTR.  
.
Perform the edit (page 6-12).  
.
Confirm and modify the edit points  
(pages 6-8 and 6-10).  
.
Insert mode  
Confirm the results of the edit (page 6-13).  
New scenes are inserted into the middle of previously  
recorded scenes. CTL signals on tape in the recorder  
VTR are not overwritten. Video, digital audio, cue  
audio, and time code signals can be recorded  
separately.  
Editing precautions  
Using an editing control unit  
Both of these two edit modes support DMC editing.  
In insert mode, you can also use split editing.  
When using an editing control unit to control the VTR,  
set the edit delay on the control unit so that CUT-IN  
and CUT-OUT commands are sent to the VTR five  
frames ahead of the actual edit point.  
Interpolation of time codes by the CTL  
counter  
To use time codes as addresses of edit points, the time  
codes must be recorded on the tape in ascending order.  
As long as they are in ascending order, time codes do  
not have to be continuous. The CTL counter  
automatically interpolates data for editing even if there  
are breaks in the continuity in the time codes.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
6-1-2 Setting Switches and Menus  
Before editing, set the following switches as shown  
below.  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons: input signal  
Recorder VTR  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
POWER switch: ON  
REC level controls: recording levels  
REMOTE buttons: None of  
these buttons light up.  
[F1] (VIDEO IN) button in the PF1 menu (factory setting):  
SDI, SDTI(when HKDV-506A is installed)  
[F1] (TIMER SELECT) button in the TC menu:  
TC or CTL  
Player VTR  
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
POWER switch: ON  
REMOTE buttons: 1(9P) button  
lights up.  
PB level controls:  
playback levels  
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: CTL or TC  
Setting switches and menus  
6-2  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1-3 Selecting the Edit Mode  
6-1-4 Setting Edit Points  
Select assemble or insert mode.  
This section describes how to set edit points (IN and  
OUT points). In insert mode, a technque called split  
editing allows you to set edit points separately for  
video and audio.  
[F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME menu  
Positioning and setting edit points  
1
[F4] (INS TC) to [F10] (INS CUE) buttons in the HOME menu  
Selecting the edit mode  
Press one of the following buttons to select the  
respective edit mode:  
Assemble mode: [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the  
HOME menu  
3
2
Insert mode: the appropriate INSERT button in  
the HOME menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS  
VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2),  
[F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS  
CUE))  
Positioning and setting edit points  
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.  
The button lights up.  
2 Rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to  
position the edit point.  
For details on jog or shuttle playback, refer to “5-4-2  
Variable Speed Playback” on page 5-11.  
3 Press the IN (or OUT) button while holding down  
the ENTRY button.  
The time data for the IN (or OUT) point appears in  
the menu display.  
4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to set the remaining edit  
points. Editing can begin when the points are set.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons  
3 Press the SET button to set the input data.  
SET is  
displayed.  
2
CLR button1  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
01 00 30 00  
PB/EE  
PB  
SET  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN 00:01:10:00  
PLÅYER  
off  
INS  
TC  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
off  
INS  
INS INS INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
4 3  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons  
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.  
The button lights up.  
4 Press the IN (or OUT) button.  
The time data for the IN (or OUT) point appears in  
the menu display.  
2 Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons.  
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,  
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When  
the entered value is less than eight digits, the  
leading digit(s) are set to 0 when you press the  
SET button.)  
About automatic edit point setting  
Editing requires a total of four edit points: IN and  
OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs.  
However, as soon as you set three edit points, the VTR  
automatically sets the fourth point.  
In the figure below, the points enclosed in a box have  
been set manually, while the OUT point for the player  
VTR has been set automatically.  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
PB/EE  
PB  
Entered data are  
displayed.  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
IN point  
OUT point  
RECINH  
off  
$
$
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
Recorder VTR  
Player VTR  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN 00:01:10:00  
PLÅYER  
off  
INS  
TC  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
off  
INS  
INS INS INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
4
4
IN point  
OUT point  
To delete entered data  
Automatic edit point setting  
Press the CLR button.  
Whether set manually or automatically, all edit points  
can be changed or deleted at any time.  
6-4  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic setting of OUT points  
When the fourth edit point (OUT point) is set, the edit  
point data is activated and the invalid point is  
automatically deleted  
Split editing  
Positioning and setting edit points  
Split editing allows you to set edit points separately for  
video and audio. Set audio edit points with the  
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons and video edit points with  
the IN/OUT buttons.  
Automatically  
set edit point  
IN point  
OUT point OUT point  
Split editing, however, can only be done when the  
recorder VTR is in insert mode.  
$
$
$
Recorder VTR  
Player VTR  
2
4
4
IN point  
OUT point  
Fourth edit point  
1
4
3
Automatic setting of IN points  
When an IN point is corrected, the OUT point is set  
automatically using the duration of the VTR whose  
edit points were not changed.  
Positioning and setting edit points  
1 Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME  
menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO),  
[F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS  
A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS CUE)).  
IN point  
OUT point  
$
$
Recorder VTR  
2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.  
The button lights up.  
Player VTR  
3 To locate the edit points, rotate the search dial in  
4
4
4
4
jog or shuttle mode.  
IN point  
IN point  
OUT point OUT point  
For details on jog/shuttle/variable playback modes,  
refer to “5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback” on page 5-11.  
Corrected  
edit point  
Automatically  
set edit point  
4 Press the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT)  
button while holding down the ENTRY button.  
5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to set the remaining edit  
points.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons  
4 Press the SET button to set the input data.  
SET is  
displayed.  
CLR button  
3
2
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
01 00 30 00  
PB/EE  
PB  
SET  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
IN 00:01:20:00  
PLÅYER  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
OUT 00:02:20:00  
off  
INS  
TC  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00  
off  
INS  
INS INS INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
1 5 4  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons  
1 Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME  
menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO),  
5 Press the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT)  
button.  
[F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS  
A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS CUE)).  
The time data for the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or  
AUDIO OUT) point appears in the menu display.  
2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.  
The button lights up.  
About automatic split edit point setting  
Split editing requires a total of eight edit points: four  
edit points for video editing (IN and OUT points for  
both the recorder and player VTRs) and four edit points  
for audio editing (AUDIO IN and OUT points for both  
the recorder and player VTRs). However, as soon as  
you set five edit points, the VTR automatically sets the  
remaining three points. For example, if you set three  
edit points for video (or audio) and two for audio (or  
video), the remaining three points are automatically set,  
regardless of whether these points are for the recorder  
or player.  
In the following example, the points enclosed in a box  
have been set manually and the AUDIO OUT point for  
the recorder VTR, and the AUDIO IN and OUT points  
for the player VTR have been set automatically.  
Note that whether set manually or automatically, all  
edit points can be changed or deleted at any time.  
3 Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons.  
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,  
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When  
the entered value is less than eight digits, the  
leading digit(s) are set to 0 when you press the  
SET button.)  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
PB/EE  
PB  
Input data  
are displayed.  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
IN 00:01:20:00  
PLÅYER  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
OUT 00:02:20:00  
off  
INS  
TC  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00  
off  
INS  
INS INS INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
AUDIO  
IN point  
$
AUDIO  
OUT point  
$
off off off off off  
off  
IN point  
OUT point  
$
$
Recorder VTR  
To delete entered data  
Press the CLR button.  
Player VTR  
4
4
4
4
OUT point  
AUDIO  
IN point  
IN point  
AUDIO  
OUT point  
Automatic split edit point setting  
6-6  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic setting of AUDIO OUT points  
When the sixth edit point (AUDIO OUT point) is set,  
the edit point data is activated and the invalid AUDIO  
OUT points are automatically deleted  
You can select audio cut-in, crossfade, and fade in/out  
in edits, as well as their duration, in the VTR SETUP  
menu.  
For details, refer to the menu items in the 300 range in the  
VTR SETUP menu.  
Sixth edit point set  
AUDIO  
OUT point  
Using a VTR without the split editing function  
If the player VTR does not support the separate setting  
of edit points for video and audio, you can set AUDIO  
IN and AUDIO OUT points on the recorder and three  
video edit points to enable split editing.  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
OUT  
IN point  
OUT point  
IN point  
point  
$
$
$
$
$
Recorder VTR  
Player VTR  
6-1-5 Editing Non-audio Data  
4
4
4
4
4
Before editing non-audio data, set item 317.AUDIO  
EDIT MODE in the VTR SETUP menu to “cut edit.”  
OUT point  
AUDIO  
IN point  
IN point  
AUDIO  
OUT point  
Note  
Noise may be produced during editing of certain non-  
audio data.  
AUDIO  
OUT point  
Edit point set  
automatically  
Automatic setting of edit points by correcting  
IN points  
When IN points are corrected, the duration in the  
uncorrected VTR is used to automatically set OUT  
points and AUDIO IN/OUT points.  
AUDIO  
IN point  
AUDIO  
OUT point  
IN point  
OUT point  
$
$
$
$
Recorder VTR  
Player VTR  
4
4
4
4
4
4
AUDIO  
IN point  
OUT points  
IN point  
AUDIO  
OUT points  
IN point  
AUDIO  
IN points  
Automatically  
set edit point  
Corrected  
IN point  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
6-1-6 Confirming Edit Points  
6-1-7 Cuing Up and Prerolling  
You can preroll the tape to a point prior to the edit start  
point (preroll point), or cue up the tape to any edit  
point.  
Displaying the duration between two edit  
points  
Follow the procedure below to cue up or preroll the  
tape.  
The following six kinds of duration can be displayed in  
the time data display window:  
• Between IN and OUT points  
1
• Between IN and AUDIO OUT points  
• Between IN and AUDIO IN points  
• Between OUT and AUDIO OUT points  
• Between OUT and AUDIO IN points  
• Between AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points  
Durations are calculated as follows.  
• If both IN and OUT points are set, the duration is the  
time between the points.  
• If one of the edit points is not set, the duration is set  
to 00:00:00.  
2
Cuing up and prerolling  
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR which you want to operate.  
The button lights up.  
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR for which you want to confirm a  
duration.  
The button lights up.  
2 To cue up the tape to an edit point  
Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT  
button while holding down the PREROLL button.  
The tape moves to the edit point corresponding to  
the button, then stops.  
2 Hold down any two IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or  
AUDIO OUT buttons.  
The duration between the points corresponding to  
the two buttons is displayed. The value can be  
negative.  
To preroll the tape  
Press the PREROLL button.  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
TC  
TIMER  
SEL  
The tape is rewound to a point before the edit start  
point by the amount determined by the preroll time  
setting.  
TC  
PLAY  
LOCK  
DUR VITC  
2FD F1  
TIMER  
RESET  
00Ó01µ00ß00ƒ  
Duration  
between two  
edit points  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00  
TIMER  
SET  
Note  
TIMER  
HOLD  
When the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu is  
set to CTL, cuing up is slightly slower than in TC  
mode. This is to maintain the accuracy of the CTL  
signals.  
off  
TC  
TCG  
TCG  
RUN  
DF/NDF VITC  
df TCG  
SEL  
SOURCE MODE  
MODE  
VITC  
int prst  
rec  
You can set up the VTR so that priority is placed on  
cuing accuracy or speed. Change the VTR setting  
through 403. CUEUP BY TC and 404. CUEUP BY  
CTL in the VTR SETUP menu.  
Displaying the duration between two edit points  
6-8  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the preroll time  
6-1-8 Previewing  
The preroll time is factory set to 5 seconds, but can be  
set to any time between 0 and 30 seconds, in 1-second  
steps.  
Follow the procedure below to preview the edit  
AUTO button  
For details, see Section 4-2-7, “Setting the Preroll Time  
(PREROLL TIME)” on page 4-18.  
PREVIEW/REVIEW  
button  
When changing the preroll time, set it so that the  
recorded section prior to the edit start point is longer  
than the preroll time.  
The preroll time used in automatic editing is the preroll  
time set for the recorder.  
PREROLL button  
STOP button  
Previewing  
To preview the edit, press the AUTO button to switch  
to AUTO mode, then press the PREVIEW/REVIEW  
button.  
During previewing, the PREVIEW/REVIEW button  
lights up.  
After previewing, correct the edit points as required,  
then do the preview again.  
For details on modifying edit points, refer to “6-1-9  
Modifying Edit Points” on page 6-10.  
To stop previewing  
Press the STOP button.  
The tape stops immediately.  
To rewind the tape to the preroll point  
Press the PREROLL button.  
To rewind the tape to the edit point  
Press the PREROLL button together with the button  
corresponding to the edit point.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
Monitoring signals during previewing  
During previewing, you can monitor the following  
video and audio signals on a monitor connected to the  
recorder VTR:  
• Between preroll and IN points: Playback signal of  
the recorder VTR can be monitored.  
• Between IN and OUT points: Playback signal of the  
player VTR can be monitored in E-E mode.  
• Between OUT and post-roll points: Playback signal  
of the recorder VTR can be monitored.  
6-1-9 Modifying Edit Points  
If an edit point is incorrectly set, for example, if an  
OUT point is located before an IN point, or the length  
of an edit section is different for the recorder and  
player VTRs, the time data for the incorrectly set edit  
point flash indicating that the VTR cannot perform  
editing or previewing. In this case, delete the edit  
point, then set a new one correctly.  
You can also move an edit point position in one-frame  
units.  
This may be illustrated as shown below:  
Deleting edit points  
OUT point  
$
IN point  
$
PB  
(recorder VTR)  
EE  
(player VTR)  
PB  
1
(recorder VTR)  
2
Deleting edit points  
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR on which to perform the edit point  
deletion.  
The button lights up.  
2 Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT  
button while holding down the CLR button to  
delete the corresponding edit point.  
The edit point is deleted and --:--:--:-- appears in  
the menu display.  
6-10  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Press the + or – button, then use the numeric  
buttons to enter the value to be added or  
subtracted.  
Moving an edit point position by one  
frame at a time  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
PB/EE  
PB  
+ 30 00  
Entered value  
is displayed.  
1
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN 00:01:10:00  
PLÅYER  
off  
INS  
TC  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
off  
INS  
INS INS INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
2,3  
Moving an edit point position by one frame at a time  
To cancel the entered value  
Press the CLR button.  
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR on which to modify the edit point.  
The button lights up.  
3 Press the SET button.  
The result of the addition or subtraction is entered.  
2 Press the + or – button while holding down the IN,  
OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button.  
SET is  
displayed.  
CH.COND  
GREEN  
HOME  
01 00 30 00  
PB/EE  
PB  
Pressing the + or – button moves the edit point by  
one frame forward or backward, respectively.  
SET  
PLAY  
LOCK  
TCR  
2FD F1  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
IN 00:01:10:00  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
3 After making the modification, release the  
respective edit point button that you have been  
holding down (IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO  
OUT button).  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
OUT 00:02:10:00  
PLÅYER  
off  
INS  
TC  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00  
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00  
off  
INS  
INS INS INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
Moving an edit point position with the numeric  
buttons  
4 Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT  
button.  
1
The modified time data for the edit point appears  
in the menu display.  
4 2 3  
Moving an edit point position with the numeric buttons  
1 Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT  
button while holding down the CLR button.  
Time data for the edit point appears in the data  
entry window.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
6-1-10 Performing Automatic Editing  
Overview  
Once you have set the necessary edit points, the  
AUTO button lights up to show that the VTR is ready  
for automatic editing.  
During automatic editing, the tape in the recorder VTR  
and the player VTR move as shown in the diagram  
below.  
Preroll point  
IN point  
OUT point  
Post-roll point  
.
$
$
.
Recorder VTR  
Prerolla)  
Post-rollb)  
Over-  
recordingc)  
Assemble editing  
Insert editing  
Playback mode  
Stop  
Player VTR  
Playback mode  
Stop  
Tape movement during automatic editing  
a) Preroll time: Factory-set to 5 seconds. Can be set from 0 to 30  
seconds, in 1-second steps, through the SET UP menu.  
b) The post-roll time can be set between 0 and 30 seconds in units  
of seconds using the SET UP menu.  
c) Over-recording time: 2 seconds.  
6-12  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring signals during editing  
During editing, you can monitor the following video  
and audio signals on a monitor connected to the  
recorder VTR.  
• Between preroll and IN points: Playback signal of  
the recorder VTR can be monitored.  
• Between IN and OUT points: Playback signal of the  
player VTR can be monitored in E-E mode.  
• Between OUT and post-roll points: Playback signal  
of the recorder VTR can be monitored.  
To perform automatic editing  
To carry out automatic editing, press the AUTO  
button, turning it on, then press the REC/EDIT button.  
During editing the indicator above the REC/EDIT  
button lights up, and goes off at the end.  
AUTO button  
PREVIEW/REVIEW button  
The video and audio signals that can be monitored are  
shown in the diagram below.  
IN point  
$
OUT point  
$
REC/EDIT button  
OUT button  
PB  
PB  
(recorder VTR)  
EE  
(player VTR)  
(recorder VTR)  
ENTRY button  
Performing automatic editing  
To stop automatic editing  
Press the OUT button while holding down the ENTRY  
button.  
Monitoring signals during editing  
The point where the buttons are pressed is treated as an  
OUT point and editing stops.  
In CONFI mode, you can monitor video and audio  
signals that are just being edited.  
Through a menu setting, you can also monitor signals  
between preroll and postroll points, including portions  
between IN and OUT points, through the CONFI  
(confidence) heads during editing.  
The CONFI setting is made in item 017.PB/EE  
SELECT MENU in the VTR SETUP menu.  
To confirm the results of the editing  
Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW button to confirm the  
edit results. When the preview ends, the tape rewinds  
to the OUT point, then stops.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing  
Modifying edit points for automatic editing  
later  
After you perform automatic editing, the time data of  
IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points remain  
stored in memory. The stored data can be later used to  
modify edit points or to execute automatic editing  
again.  
Follow the procedure below to modify edit points after  
executing automatic editing.  
1
3
Modifying edit points for automatic editing later  
1 In HOME menu, press the ALT button, and then  
the [F10] (LAST EDIT) button.  
The edit points used in the last automatic edit are  
restored.  
2 Modify the edit points.  
For details on modifying edit points, see Section 6-1-9,  
“Modifying Edit Points” on page 6-10.  
3 Press the REC/EDIT button.  
The VTR performs automatic editing.  
6-14  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing  
This section describes the following advanced editing  
methods:  
Setting edit points and playback speed  
DMC editing  
Animation editing  
Preread editing  
Use the procedure below to set edit points and  
playback speeds for DMC editing.  
1
2
6-2-1 Performing DMC Editing  
If your player VTR has DT (Dynamic Tracking)  
capability, you can perform variable speed editing by  
controlling the playback speed from the lower control  
panel. This type of editing is called DMC editing.  
3
4 5  
Overview of DMC editing  
Setting edit points and playback speed  
Requirements for DMC editing  
DMC editing may be done during assemble or insert  
editing, but not during split editing.  
The player VTR must support DT playback.  
1 Pressthe[F3]  
menu,orpresstherespectiveINSERTbutton([F4]  
(INSTC),[F5] (INSVIDEO),[F6] (INSA-CH1),  
(INSA-CH2),F[8] (INSA-CH3),F[9] (INS  
(INSCUE)button)toselectthe  
(ASSEMBLE)buttonintheHOME  
F[7]  
Tape movement during DMC editing  
During DMC editing, the tape moves as shown in the  
diagram below.  
A-CH4)or[F10]  
edit mode that you want.  
2 Press the PLAYER button to set the VTR to act as  
the player VTR.  
OUT point  
Post-roll  
IN point  
Preroll  
$
$
The PLAYER button lights up.  
Recorder  
VTR  
3 PresstheALT/[F7]  
(DMC)buttonsintheHOME  
menu.  
The button lights up and the VTR enters DMC  
editing mode.  
Stop  
4 Press the IN button while holding down the  
ENTRY button to set an edit point.  
Playback  
mode  
DMC editing mode  
Playback  
mode  
Note  
Preroll time ×  
initial speed  
IN point  
Post-roll time ×  
final speed  
You cannot set an OUT point for the player VTR  
for DMC editing.  
$
Player  
VTR  
Moves at  
the initial  
speed.  
Playback at speeds  
stored in memory  
Stop  
Moves at  
the final  
speed.  
Tape movement during DMC editing  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing  
5 Press the STOP button. The VTR enters STOP  
Performing DMC editing  
mode.  
After setting the playback speeds in preview mode,  
press the RECORDER button and REC/EDIT button.  
DMC editing is performed at the playback speed(s)  
stored in memory.  
9 7 6,8  
6 Turn the search dial to set the initial speed.  
The selected speed is displayed in the time data  
display.  
PREVIEW/REVIEW button  
Performing DMC editing  
7 Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW and PREROLL  
buttons at the same time.  
To confirm the results of DMC editing  
Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW button.  
The tape prerolls and the player VTR begins  
playing at the initial speed.  
8 When the pindicator appears with beep indicating  
that the IN point has been passed, rotate the search  
dial to the desired playback speed(s).  
The varying playback speeds are stored in memory  
while the pindicator appears in the display.  
9 Press the STOP button.  
If the p indicator goes off before the tape  
passes the OUT point  
The VTR has reached its storage capacity, and cannot  
store any more playback speed variations.  
To exit DMC editing mode  
PresstheALT/[F7]  
(DMC)buttonsinHOMEmenu.  
6-16  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Set the IN point. The OUT point is set  
6-2-2 Animation Editing  
automatically.  
Animation editing is a form of insert editing which  
makes it easier to record a succession of still frames in  
fixed field or frame units. The procedure for editing  
after selecting animation editing is exactly the same as  
for normal insert editing.  
2 Press the AUTO button.  
The button lights up.  
3 Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW button to preview.  
To select animation editing, use item 301. EDIT  
OPERATION MODE in the VTR SETUP menu.  
normal: Selects normal insert editing.  
CG: Selects editing in frame units, principally for  
recording computer graphics (CG).  
4 Press the REC/EDIT button.  
Automatic editing starts.  
When the edit completes, the OUT point  
automatically becomes the next IN point, and the  
next OUT point is set automatically.  
Repeat Steps 3 to 4 to perform animation editing.  
When the edit completes, the OUT point  
automatically becomes the next IN point, and the  
next OUT point is set automatically with 1 frame  
added.  
film: Selects editing in field units for film recording.  
Since the standard film speed is 24 frames/sec and  
VTR frame rate is 30 frames/sec when the frame  
frequency is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz, the duration must  
be alternated between 2 and 3 fields when  
recording films. In the FILM mode, this setting is  
made automatically. When an edit ends, as in the  
CG mode, the next IN and OUT points are set  
automatically.  
Note  
film is selectable only when the frame frequency of  
the VTR is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
Follow the procedure below to perform animation  
editing.  
2
1
4 3  
Performing animation editing  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing  
6-2-3 Performing Preread Editing  
Notes  
In preread editing, if an input video signal is used as  
the reference signal for the output video signal,  
oscillation may occur because of loop connections.  
To avoid this, select the external reference signal for  
preread editing by setting the item 005. SERVO/AV  
REFERENCE select in the VTR SETUP menu to  
external.  
When preread mode is selected, shifting of the VTR  
to E-E mode is disabled in all operation modes to  
prevent oscillation caused by loop connections. If  
preread mode is deselected while a loop between the  
input and output of the same channel exists, E-E  
signals are output and oscillation occurs. To prevent  
oscillation, do the procedure below to select PB mode  
for both the video and digital audio channels before  
the start of preread editing.  
Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the  
tape can be used as an edit source for insert editing.  
This type of editing is called preread editing, as the  
VTR uses preread heads to read signals in advance.  
Signals that are read in advance can be sent to mixers  
for mixing, then recorded to the original channels or  
other digital audio channels.  
The preread editing settings are performed with the  
ALT/[F1]  
(PREREAD)buttonsintheHOMEmenu.  
For details on the settings, refer to 4-2-4 Preread Settings  
(PREREAD)on page 4-17.  
Video  
source  
1 PresstheALT/[F1]  
(PREREAD)buttonsinthe  
HOME menu and select video, audio, or a/v.  
2 Make the required connections for preread editing.  
Digital  
Digital video input  
video  
output  
3 Perform preread editing after selecting the insert  
Video  
switcher  
editing mode.  
4 After preread editing, undo all the connections  
used for the preread editing.  
Audio  
mixer  
Digital  
audio  
input  
5 PresstheALTbutton,andthenpress[F1]  
(PRE  
READ) button to select off.  
Digital  
audio  
output  
6 Check that no loop connections remain.  
Audio  
source  
Preread editing  
6-18  
Chapter 6 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3 Manual Editing  
Follow the procedure below to perform manual  
editing.  
7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape.  
Note  
To ensure a stable picture, start playback at least three  
seconds before the IN point.  
2
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500  
3
7 4 5,6  
Manual editing  
1 Enter jog or shuttle mode to position the tape at a  
place at least three seconds before the position at  
which you want to set an edit point.  
2 Press the AUTO button to turn it off.  
3 Press the [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME  
menu or press the respective INSERT button ([F4]  
(INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1),  
[F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS  
A-CH4) or [F10] (INS CUE) button) to select the  
edit mode that you want.  
4 Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts.  
5 Press the REC/EDIT button at the point where you  
want to start editing (IN point).  
The REC/EDIT button lights, and editing starts.  
6 Press the REC/EDIT button where you want to end  
editing (OUT point).  
Editing ends, but the tape continues to run in  
playback mode.  
Chapter 6 Editing  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
When this error message appears, the VTR enters the  
protection mode and certain operations become  
inoperable.  
Once the moisture has evaporated, the error message  
disappears and the VTR becomes normal.  
Head Cleaning  
Use the BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette to clean the  
video and audio heads. Read the instructions included  
with the cleaning cassette carefully, as improper usage  
can damage the heads.  
Please refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual on  
protection mode.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the heads.  
Insert the cleaning cassette.  
If “ERROR-10” appears immediately after  
turning the VTR on  
Leave the VTR turned on and wait until the error  
message goes off. Inserting a cassette is not possible  
while the message is on.  
The tape runs at normal playback speed for about 3  
seconds as it cleans the heads. The cleaning cassette is  
automatically ejected when the head cleaning finishes.  
Note  
When the error message disappears, you can use the  
VTR.  
Do not run the cleaning tape more than 6 times in  
succession to avoid damaging the heads.  
If you move the VTR from a cold to a warm  
location  
Leave the VTR turned off for about ten minutes since  
some time is needed for the condensation-detection  
mechanism to work.  
Please refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual on  
cleaning the video and audio heads.  
Moisture Condensation  
If you suddenly move the VTR from a cold location to  
a warm one, or use the VTR in a very humid place,  
moisture in the air can form on the head-drum or tape  
guide. This is called moisture condensation. If you  
play a tape under these conditions, the tape may adhere  
to the drum where moisture has collected and become  
damaged.  
If moisture condenses on the head-drum while you are  
operating the VTR, the error message ERROR-10”  
appears in the time data display section.  
DOLBY NR CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME  
PB/EE  
KEY-INH GREEN  
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET  
LOCK  
TCR  
ERROR - 10
DEW DETECTED  
0ƒ  
RECINH  
off  
ÅIN :00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN
:00  
off  
INS  
TC  
off  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
Time data display section  
When moisture condensation has occurred  
Appendix  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Search speed  
Shuttle mode:  
General  
Still to approx. ±60 times normal  
playback speed (with the frame  
frequency of 24Hz)  
Still to approx. ±58 times normal  
playback speed (with the frame  
frequency of 25Hz)  
Still to approx. ±50 times normal  
playback speed (with the frame  
frequency of 30Hz)  
Variable mode:  
1 to +2 times normal playback  
speed  
Jog mode:  
Still to ±2 times normal playback  
speed  
Record format  
HDCAM  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Peak inrush current  
100 to 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz  
230 W  
(1) Power ON, current probe method: 50 A (240 V),  
14 A (100V)  
(2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in  
accordance with European  
standard EN55103-1: 10 A  
(230V)  
Operating temperature  
+5°C to +40°C (+41°F to + 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
Dynamic Tracking range  
1 to +2 times normal playback  
speed  
Load/unload time 6 seconds or less  
Recommended tapes  
20°C to +60°C (4°F to + 140°F)  
25% to 80% (relative humidity)  
35 kg  
Humidity  
Mass  
Dimensions  
427 × 237 × 520 mm (w/h/d)  
HDCAM cassette (S- and L-sizes)  
(16 3/4 × 9 3/8 × 20 1/2 inches)  
Digital video system  
Tape system  
Digital video signal format  
Sampling frequency  
Tape speed  
77.4 mm/s (with the frame  
frequency of 24Hz)  
80.7mm/s (with the frame  
frequency of 25Hz)  
96.7mm/s (with the frame  
frequency of 30Hz)  
Y: 74.25 MHz  
B/PR: 37.125 MHz  
P
Quantization  
10 bits/sample (Compression:  
8 bits/sample)  
Compression  
Channel coding  
Coefficient recording system  
S-NRZI PR-IV  
Digital record/playback time (Using L-size cassette)  
155 minutes (with the frame  
frequency of 24Hz)  
Error correction Reed-Solomon code  
Error concealment Adaptive three dimensional  
149 minutes (with the frame  
frequency of 25Hz)  
124 minutes (with the frame  
frequency of 30Hz)  
Analog composite output (with optional HKDV-  
501A)  
Bandwidth  
S/N ratio  
Y: 0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/3.0 dB  
56 dB or more  
Fast forward/rewind time  
Approx. 3 minutes (Using L-size  
cassettes)  
Y/C delay  
15 ns or less  
K factor (2T Pulse)  
1% or less  
Output SCH phase  
Based upon RS-170A/CCIR  
R.624-3  
A-2  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital audio system  
Input connectors  
Digital audio signal format (CH-1 to CH-4)  
Sampling frequency  
HD SDI INPUT  
BNC (1 + 1 INPUT MONITOR)  
48 kHz (synchronized with video)  
20 bits/sample  
HD SDI (1.485 Gbps) (conforms to  
SMPTE 292M/BTA S-004B)  
Quantization  
Wow and flutter Below measurable level  
SDTI (OPTION) IN  
Headroom  
Emphasis  
Selectable settings: 20, 18, 16, 15,  
14, 12, and 9 dB  
T1=50 µs, T2=15 µs (on/off  
selectable in recording mode)  
(when the optional HKDV-506A is  
installed)  
BNC (1)  
SDTI (270Mbps)  
REF. IN  
HD  
Analog output  
BNC (2 + 2 loop-through)  
Trilevel SYNC  
0.6 V p-p, 75 , sync negative  
Black burst  
A/D quantization 20 bits/sample  
D/A quantization 20 bits/sample  
Frequency response  
SD  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/1.0 dB  
(0 dB at 1 kHz)  
0.286 V p-p, 75 , sync negative  
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)  
Dynamic range  
Distortion  
More than 95 dB (at 1 kHz,  
emphasis on)  
Less than 0.05% (at 1 kHz,  
emphasis on, reference level1))  
Less than 90 dB (at 1 kHz,  
between any two channels)  
BNC (2 + 2 loop-through)  
CH1/2 and CH3/4  
AES/EBU format, unbalanced  
AUDIO INPUT  
Crosstalk  
XLR 3-pin, female (5)  
CH1, 2, 3, 4 and CUE  
LOW OFF: 60 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
HIGH OFF: +4 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
HIGH ON: +4 dBm, 600 Ω  
termination, balanced  
Analog audio (Cue track)  
Frequency response  
90 Hz to 12 kHz ±3 dB  
S/N ratio  
More than 45 dB (at 3% distortion  
level)  
TIME CODE IN  
XLR 3-pin, female (1)  
0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 10 k, balanced  
Distortion  
Less than 2% (T.H.D at 1 kHz  
reference level1))  
Wow and flutter Less than 0.2% rms  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) Reference level: + 4 dBm  
Note  
gender conventions for input and output connectors in Japan  
The ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,  
and TIME CODE IN/OUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) have  
which are opposite to those everywhere else in the world. If  
using this unit with non-Japanese specification equipment,  
use male/female adaptors.  
Appendix  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
REF. OUT  
1125 SYNC  
Output connectors  
BNC (2)  
Trilevel SYNC  
0.6 Vp-p, 75 , sync negative  
HD SDI OUTPUT  
BNC (4, MONITOR with  
superimposed text)  
1, 2, 3 and MONITOR  
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)  
BNC (2)  
CH1/2 and CH3/4  
SDI (1.485 Gbps) (conforms to  
SMPTE 292M/BTA-S004B)  
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)  
AES/EBU format, unbalanced  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
XLR 3-pin, male (5)  
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4 and CUE  
+4 dBm, (with 600 load), low  
impedance, balanced  
MONITOR OUTPUT  
(when the optional HKDV-501A  
is installed, D1/D2 switchable)  
BNC (3, 3(SUPER) with  
superimposed text)  
1, 2 and 3(SUPER)  
XLR, 3-pin, female (2)  
D1 SDI (270 Mbps) (conforms to  
SMPTE 259M/CCIR-656-III)  
D2 SDI (143 Mbps) (conforms to  
SMPTE 259M/CCIR-656-III)  
L and R  
+4 dBm (with a 600 load), low  
impedance, balanced  
TIME CODE OUT  
XLR, 3-pin, male (1)  
2.2 Vp-p, low impedance, balanced  
D CONV. OUT (OPTION)  
(when the optional HKDV-501A is  
installed)  
BNC (2, COMPOSITE (SUPER)  
with superimposed text)  
PHONES  
JM-60 stereo phone jack  
to 12 dBu (with an 8 load),  
unbalanced  
COMPOSITE (SUPER)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 , sync negative  
Black burst  
SYNC  
0.286 Vp-p, 75 , sync negative  
SDTI (OPTION) OUT  
Remote connectors  
(when the optional HKDV-506A is  
installed)  
BNC (1)  
SDTI (270 Mbps)  
CONTROL PANEL  
D-sub 15-pin, female  
D-sub 9-pin, female  
REMOTE 1-OUT D-sub 9-pin, female  
REMOTE 1-IN  
PULL DOWN OUT (OPTION)  
RS-232C  
D-sub 25-pin, female  
(when the optional HKDV-507/  
507D is installed)  
BNC (2, with superimposed text)  
VIDEO CONTROL  
D-sub 9-pin, female (for optional  
HKDV-503)  
PARALLEL I/O (50P)  
D-sub 50-pin, female (with  
optional BKDW-509)  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
Note  
The ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,  
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,  
and TIME CODE IN/OUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) have  
gender conventions for input and output connectors in Japan  
which are opposite to those everywhere else in the world. If  
using this unit with non-Japanese specification equipment,  
use male/female adaptors.  
A-4  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories supplied  
AC power cord (1)  
RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (1)  
PSW 4 × 16 screws for rack mounting (4)  
SRAM 64 KB Memory card (1)  
Operation Manual (1)  
Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1)  
Optional accessories  
HKDV-501A HD-SD Cconverter Board  
HKDV-502 HD Line Converter Board  
HKDV-503 HD Digital Video Controller  
HKDV-506A SDTI Board  
HKDV-507/507D HD Pull Down Board  
BKDW-509 Parallel (50-pin) Interface Kit  
RMM-110 Rack Mount Adaptor  
BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette  
MLB-1B-100 Memory Label  
Recommended accessories  
For details about recommended accessories, contact  
your Sony service representative.  
Parallel/serial converter  
HD-694 equivalent from ASTRO DESIGN  
Corporation  
XLR/BNC adaptors  
BCJ-XP-TRA equivalent from CANARE Corporation  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Appendix  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Information Display  
VIDEO INT SG  
Information on the operational status of the unit and  
discrepancies between the field frequency of the tape  
and that of the unit can be shown in the display.  
off: The type of the test signal generated by the  
internal video test signal generator is not displayed.  
on: The type of the test signal generated by the  
internal video test signal generator is displayed.  
CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME  
PB/EE  
GREEN  
LOCK  
TCR  
PLÅY  
4FD F1  
AUDIO INT SG  
RECINH  
off  
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ  
OUT 00:00:00:00  
off: The operating status of the internal audio test  
signal generator is not displayed.  
on: The operating status of the internal audio test  
signal generator is displayed.  
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN 00:00:00:00  
i
i
off  
OPERATION INFO  
FREQ:  
60Hz60Hz  
VIDEO INT SG: CB  
AUDIO INT SG: silnc  
INS  
TC  
off  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
META DATA  
off off off off off  
off  
off: Settings are not displayed during the recording  
of meta data.  
on: Settings are displayed during the recording of  
meta data.  
Operation information  
Note  
The operation information can be viewed in any menu  
except the CUE or SET UP menu.  
Information displayed for each item  
The information displayed for ACTIVE LINE (HD),  
VIDEO INT SG and AUDIO INT SG are specified by  
T02.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR  
(HD), T03.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR LINE SELECT and T04.INTERNAL  
AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR.  
Selecting items to be displayed  
Use 121.INFORMATION DISPLAY in the VTR  
SETUP menu to select the items to be displayed.  
The items and the functions that can be set by  
item 121. are as follows:  
The T02.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR (HD) settings and display  
information  
SYSTEM FREQUENCY  
off: The field frequency of both the unit and the tape  
Setting of item T02  
Displayed information  
are not displayed.  
off  
off  
diff: The field frequency of both the unit and the  
tape are displayed only when they do not match.  
ever: The field frequency of both the unit and the  
tape are always displayed.  
COLOR BARS  
MULTIBURST  
10 STEPS  
PULSE & BAR  
RAMP  
CB  
MB  
10STP  
P&BAR  
RAMP  
BLACK  
ACTIVE LINE (HD)  
off: The effective scanning line number to be input  
or played back, and to be output are not displayed.  
diff: The effective scanning line number to be input  
and output are displayed only when they do not  
match.  
BLACK  
The T03.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR  
LINE SELECT settings and display information  
Setting of item T03  
Displayed information  
ever: The effective scanning line number to be input  
and output are always displayed.  
1035  
1080  
1035  
1080  
EOS DISPLAY  
off: EOS is not displayed.  
Note  
This setting is only active when the frame frequency of  
the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
on: EOS is displayed.  
A-6  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The T04.INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL  
GENERATOR settings and display information  
Setting of item T04  
off  
Displayed information  
off  
silence  
silnc  
1kHz  
1 kHz sine  
Display priority of display messages  
Messages are displayed in the following order of  
priority:  
Error messages  
.
Lost lock messages  
.
Warning messages  
.
Player edit points and time data  
.
Operation information  
.
Pull down time data (when optional HKDV-507/507D  
HD Pull Down Board is installed)  
Or  
24-frame time data when playback in 25-frame mode  
(off-speed playback) is selected  
Appendix  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages and Warning Messages  
Error Messages  
When the unit ceases to opcº¡te correctly due to  
malfunction or an internal system error, the alarm will  
sound and an error message will be displayed on the  
Protection Mode  
To protect the tape and the mechanical parts of the  
display.  
VTR, the servo control system automatically stops  
tape transport and the drum motor and enters  
protection mode when an error occurs.  
Cassettes may not be inserted or ejected during  
protection mode.  
Only one message will be displayed even when  
multiple errors occur, but the error log menu keeps a  
history of the errors.  
For more information about error messages, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
Note  
When a cassette is stuck in the unit because of  
protection mode, make sure to disconnect the power  
before removing the cassette manually.  
After the error occurs, eliminate the cause of the error  
and turn the unit back on. If the error message appears  
again when the unit is turned on, contact your Sony  
representative.  
For information about removing cassettes manually, refer to  
the supplied Maintenance Manual.  
For more information about eliminating errors, refer to the  
supplied Maintenance Manual.  
DOLBY NR CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME  
PB/EE  
KEY-INH GREEN  
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET  
LOCK  
TCR  
ERROR - 01
REEL TROUBLE-1  
0ƒ  
RECINH  
off  
ÅIN :00  
ÅSSEM-  
BLE  
IN
:00  
off  
INS  
TC  
Error message  
off  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
INS  
CUE  
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4  
off off off off off  
off  
01 REEL TROUBLE-1: Slack in the tape was detected during threading or unthreading.  
02 REEL TROUBLE-2: Slack in the tape was detected during searching, rewinding, or fast-forward.  
03 REEL TROUBLE-3: Slack in the tape was detected during playback or recording.  
04 REEL TROUBLE-4: Abnormality in tape speed was detected during fast-forward or rewinding.  
05 REEL TROUBLE-5: Abnormality detected in the operation of S or T reels during cassette compartment operation. Or, current flow for S or  
T reels deviated from the fixed value.  
06 TAPE TENSION ERROR: Excessive tension detected during recording or playback.  
07 CAPSTAN TROUBLE: Abnormality detected in capstan motor operation.  
08 DRUM TROUBLE: Abnormality detected in drum motor operation.  
09 TH/UNTH MOTOR TIME OUT: Abnormality detected during threading or unthreading.  
0A THREADING TROUBLE: Tape top process did not end normally during threading.  
10 DEW DETECTED: Condensation detected.  
11 TAPE TOP/END SENSOR TROUBLE: Top and end of tape were detected simultaneously.  
12 TAPE TOP SENSOR TROUBLE: Trouble with the tape top sensor.  
13 TAPE END SENSOR TROUBLE: Trouble with the tap end sensor.  
14 FAN MOTOR TROUBLE: Abnormality detected in the operation of the fan motor.  
20 CASSETTE COMPARTMENT MOTOR LOCK: Abnormality detected during cassette compartment operation.  
21 REEL SHIFT MOTOR LOCK: Abnormality detected when moving the reel base corresponding to the cassette size.  
22 REEL POSITION SENSOR TROUBLE: Positions for L cassette and S cassette reel positions were detected simultaneously.  
92 INTERNAL INTERFACE: Abnormality detected in the communication with the CPU on the circuit board.  
93 CPU INITIALIZE ERROR: When the unit was powered up, an abnormality was detected in the initial communication with the CPU.  
97 SV NV-RAM TROUBLE: An abnormality was detected while reading servo adjustment data after the unit was turned on.  
A0 READ WRITE ERROR: Error occurred during reading and writing to the SS-88 on-board RAM.  
A1 SY ROM ERROR: Error detected while reading system computer ROM data when the unit was turned on.  
A-8  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A2 DR NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERROR: Error detected while reading machine type data when the unit was turned on.  
A3 SYS NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERROR: Error detected while reading menu settings data when the unit was turned on.  
A4 PLAYER CONTROL COMMAND BUFFER FULL: The 9 pin serial communication send buffer for player control is full.  
A5 RS-422 REMOTE COMMAND BUFFER FULL: The 9 pin serial communication receive buffer is full.  
B0 DT HARD ERROR: Error detecting during DT distortion removal.  
B1 TCG HARD ERROR: Possibly a hardware error in the time code generator circuit or peripheral hardware.  
B2 DCP-26 BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR: The two DCP-26 boards are installed.  
B3 DCP-26 & PD-94 BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR: The DCP-26 board and PD-94 board are installed to the wrong position.  
Appendix  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages and Warning Messages  
Warning Messages  
When one of the problems described below is detected,  
a warning mark is displayed in the upper left corner of  
the display. Operation can continue even when the  
mark is flashing.  
When the mark is flashing, the warning message can  
be displayed by using the tip of a small pointed object  
to press the MAINTENANCE switch.  
Use the displayed warning information to eliminate the  
cause of the warning.  
For more information about eliminating the cause of  
warning, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
To automatically display a warning message  
Whenever a warning occurs, change item  
120.WARNING DISPLAY in the VTR SETUP menu  
to on.  
Note  
The warning messages can be viewed in any menu  
except the CUE or SET UP menu.  
To clear a warning message  
To cancel the display of a warning message, refer to  
Clearing warning messageson page A-12.  
Only one message will be displayed even if there are  
multiple messages, but a history of errors is kept in the  
error log menu.  
For more information about warning messages, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
Warning mark  
CH.COND  
DIAGNOSTICS  
ROM  
VER  
TCR 00;00;00;00  
MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY  
ERR  
LOG  
OPERATION  
529HOURS  
34HOURS[  
20HOURS[  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE TRAVEL  
THR
26H]  
16H]  
9H]  
WARNING - 02  
LOST LOCK  
Warning message  
OPTION  
INFO  
MAINTE  
EXEC  
EXIT  
01 NO EXTERNAL REFERENCE: There is no reference signal on the selected REF INPUT connector. The VTR is using an internal reference  
signal.  
02 LOST LOCK: Capstan servo lock was lost during playback, recording, or editing.  
03 NO EXTERNAL SD REFERENCE ON PD: When item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to “lock1” or  
“lock2,” no external SD reference signal is input (only when the HKDV-507D is installed).  
04 HD & SD REF ASYNCHRONOUS: When item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to “lock1” or “lock2,”  
HD reference signal and external SD reference signal are not synchronized (only when the HKDV-507D is installed).  
08 NO SDI INPUT: A SDI input signal cannot be detected.  
09 NO SDI AUDIO INPUT: No audio data detected in the SDI input signal.  
10 VITC NOT READ: VITC cannot be correctly read from the tape.  
11 AUDIO PLL UNLOCKED: Audio lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal.  
14 NO PB RF SIGNAL: Playback heads cannot correctly read digital data from the tape.  
15 INCONSISTENT EMPHASIS: Emphasis information on the tape is inconsistent with the system emphasis status.  
16 INCONSISTENT FORMAT OF META DATA: The meta data being input and the meta data recorded on the tape have different formats.  
17 PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE: The cassette is ejected automatically in line with the setting of item 018.AUTO EJECT LEVEL in the  
VTR SETUP menu because the system frequency of the VTR and the frequency of the signal recorded on the tape do not match.  
1C NO A1/A2 INPUT: No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 1 and 2  
20 NO A3/A4 INPUT: No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 3 and 4  
2D INVALID SDI DATA: SDI input signal data is invalid.  
34 NO CASSETTE COMPARTMENT MODE: The cassette compartment does not operate during no cassette compartment mode.  
3B NO LTC REPRODUCED: LTC signal not detected on the tape.  
45 DT UNLOCKED: DT cannot be correctly traced during playback, recording, or editing.  
50 PROCESSOR IS IN TEST MODE: The processor is in test mode.  
55 VIDEO PLL UNLOCKED: Video lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal.  
A-10  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Log Menu  
Openig the error log menu  
Use the tip of a narrow object to press the  
MAINTENANCE switch and press the [F2] (ERR  
LOG) button.  
The time and time codes of errors and warnings  
occurring during operation can be displayed in a list  
form in the display. (Maximum listing is 99 items.)  
CH.COND  
DIAGNOSTICS  
PAGE  
TOP  
TCR 00:00:01:05  
ERROR LOG  
'97/03/06 10:32:23  
PAGE  
END  
TOTAL 03  
1.00:00:00:00  
SYS NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERR...  
(E)  
A3  
FULL  
MSG  
2.23:59:59:09  
VIDEO DATA ERROR  
3.23:59:59:09 (C)  
AUDIO DATA ERROR  
(C)  
0B  
0F  
ALL  
CLEAR  
WARNI-  
NG  
CONDI-  
EXIT  
ERROR  
TIME  
TC  
TION  
Error Log Menu  
Button  
[F1]  
Display  
Function  
Setting  
on, off  
PAGE TOP  
PAGE END  
FULL MSG  
WARNING  
ERROR  
Move to the top page  
Move to the last page  
[F2]  
on, off  
[F3]  
Display in full the message selected with the cursor  
Display warning messages  
on, off  
[F5]  
on, off  
[F6]  
Display error messages  
on, off  
[F7]  
CONDITION  
TIME  
Display condition messages  
on, off  
[F9]  
Toggle between time code are real time display  
Return to display of maintenance information  
Clear messages (LOG DATA)  
TC, REAL  
[F10]  
EXIT  
SFT/[F4]  
ALT/[F8]  
ALT/[F9]  
ALL CLEAR  
CANCEL EDIT  
REAL TIME  
Display the CANCEL EDIT screen  
Display the REAL TIME screen  
For more information about error log menu settings, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
Appendix  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages and Warning Messages  
Clearing warning messages  
1 Press the ALT/[F8] (CANCEL EDIT) button.  
2 Select the message to be cleared using the G and  
g buttons.  
3 Press the [F2] (MARK) button.  
An asterisk *will appear in front of the  
message.  
The message will not be displayed or saved.  
Cancelling removal  
To cancel the removal of a warning message, press the  
[F2] (MARK) button.  
Adjusting the clock  
Press the ALT/[F9] (REAL TIME) button in the error  
log menu and use the setting below.  
Get current time codes  
Hold down the SFT button and press the [F5] (GET  
TC) button.  
Setting the data and time  
Hold down the SFT button and press the [F6] (SET)  
button.  
Use the f and F buttons to move the bar to the  
location to be adjusted.  
Use the numeric keys to change the value.  
Adjusting minutes and second to zero  
Hold down the SFT button and press [F8] (ZERO)  
button.  
Selecting daylight saving time and normal  
time  
Hold down the SFT button and press [F9] (SEASON)  
button.  
STANDARD: normal time  
SUMMER: daylight saving time (one hour ahead of  
normal time)  
Note  
Changing between normal and daylight saving times  
changes the current time by one hour.  
Even if the change crosses midnight, the current date is  
not changed.  
A-12  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
AES/EBU format  
Component video signal  
Effect edit mode  
A standard format for the transfer of  
digital audio signals. In this format, two  
audio signals can be input/output through  
one XLR-type connector.  
A video signal that consists of a luminance  
signal (Y) and two chrominance (color-  
difference) signals (R-Y, B-Y).  
When editing a tape using a switcher or  
when editing special effects, the pixels  
comprising the picture are often not  
dubbed to the same positions as those of  
the original. In the case of repeated  
dubbings, this shifting of pixels produces  
an accumulation of calculation errors  
during the compression/expansion process;  
this may result in an increase in low-level  
noise within the signal. The effect edit  
mode minimizes the production of this  
noise. Note, however, that a slight loss in  
picture resolution may be observed in this  
mode.  
Composite video signal  
Assemble editing  
A signal that consists of video (luminance  
and color sub carrier), sync (horizontal and  
vertical), and color burst signals.  
An edit mode for adding new scenes to the  
end of previously recorded scenes. New  
video signals are recorded for each control  
signal, but continuity with the control  
signal preceding the edit point is  
maintained electrically. Because assemble  
editing in the middle of a scene will cause  
a break in the video image at the end of the  
insertion, this is not a practical method for  
inserting new video data. This should be  
done with insert editing.  
Condensation  
Moisture that collects on the head drum of  
the tape transport mechanism, causing  
damage to the tape and malfunction of the  
VTR.  
Emphasis  
CTL  
Emphasizing the high frequencies of a  
signal before processing (pre-emphasis)  
and de-emphasizing those high frequencies  
before output (de-emphasis). This reduces  
deterioration of the signal-to-noise ratio in  
the high frequency range.  
Abbreviation for control signal. A pulse  
signal that can be counted, to determine  
the number of frames, and therefore the  
tapes running time. Used mainly for  
adjusting the tracking position of video  
heads, and to achieve time code continuity  
during continuous recording. This signal is  
recorded on a longitudinal tape track.  
See also Insert editing.  
Backspace editing  
Also called phase matching. During  
backspace editing, the VTR automatically  
rewinds the tape a few seconds after  
recording of a scene has been completed.  
This allows the tape to attain a stable  
speed before the start of recording of the  
next scene, thus maintaining signal  
continuity during editing.  
External synchronization  
A method to maintain color subcarrier  
phase continuity by performing editing in  
two-frame units in order to achieve stable  
video without horizontal fluctuation at the  
edit points. For editing, a recorder VTR (or  
master VTR) and a player VTR (or source  
VTR or slave VTR) are used, and external  
synchronization is commonly used to  
ensure that the operation timing control  
signals and time reference signals are  
synchronized.  
Cue point  
A point used to mark the beginning of a  
section of tape so that it can be located for  
later playback or editing.  
Bridging connection  
A connection that allows a signal input to  
an input terminal to pass throuth the unit  
and exit from an output terminal for input  
to a third piece of equipment.  
Drop frame mode  
When the field frequency of this unit is  
59.94 Hz, the actual number of frames per  
second is approximately 29.97, while the  
time code value advances one second  
every 30 frames. In drop frame mode, the  
time code is advanced such a way that this  
difference in the value between real time  
and the time codes is corrected.  
Specifically, two frames are skipped at the  
beginning of each minute, except for every  
tenth minute, so that the frame value for  
time codes matches that for real time.  
See also Non-drop frame mode.  
Capstan  
Insert editing  
A drive mechanism that moves the tape at  
a specified speed. Its rotation is normally  
synchronized with a reference sync signal.  
An edit mode for inserting new scenes into  
the middle of previously recorded scenes.  
CTL signals previously recorded on the  
tape are used. Consequently, this mode  
cannot be used for blank tapes. This mode  
assumes that CTL signals have somehow  
be recorded to the tape already.  
Color frame  
A color subcarrier phase having one cycle  
that consists of two frames (four fields) in  
the NTSC format.  
See also Assemble editing  
Color frame locking  
E-E mode  
Longitudinal time code  
See LTC.  
A procedure in which the time code frame  
value is set to an odd number for the first  
and second color fields, and to an even  
number for the third and fourth color  
fields.  
Abbreviation for Electric-to-Electric  
mode. In this mode, the signals are passed  
through the VTRís electronics before  
output but do not pass through the  
magnetic converter circuits such as the  
tape and head circuits. This mode is used  
for confirming input signals or adjusting  
the input level.  
LTC  
Abbreviation for Longitudinal Time Code.  
This is the time code recorded onto a  
longitudinal track of the tape. During the  
playback of still pictures, LTC cannnot be  
read since the tape is not moving. During  
slow playback, the LTC output is so small  
that it may not be read correctly,  
depending on the playback speed.  
See also VITC.  
Color framing  
A method to maintain color subcarrier  
phase continuity by performing editing in  
two-frame units in order to achieve stable  
video without horizontal fluctuation at the  
edit points when editing downconverted  
composite video signal.  
Appendix  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Non-drop frame mode  
Time code  
In this mode, drop frame mode processing  
is not performed. Since there is no frame  
cutting, a discrepancy of about 86 seconds  
occurs each day (in the case of a field  
frequency of 59.94 Hz) which causes  
problems when editing programs in units  
of seconds using the number of frames as a  
refernce.  
A digital signal recorded on the video tape  
that supplies information such as hour,  
minute, second and frame number for each  
frame to facilitate the setting of edit points  
or searching for specific scenes on the  
tape.  
There are two types of time codes: SMPTE  
(for the NTSC color system) and EBU (for  
the PAL/SECAM color system); and two  
time code recording formats: LTC  
(longitudinal time codes) which are CTL  
signals and audio signals simultaneously  
recorded longitudinally on the tape and  
VITC (vertical interval time codes) which  
are recorded on the video signal track.  
See also Drop frame mode.  
Preroll  
The rewinding of a video tape in the player  
or recorder VTR by a certain length before  
an edit point, allowing the tape to attain a  
stable speed at the edit point and  
synchronization with the other video tape  
during editing.  
Tracking  
The synchronizing of the head drum  
rotation phase and tape transport phase  
during playback and recording. Tracking  
is adjusted to eliminate picture instability  
when playing back material recorded on  
another VTR.  
Reference video signal  
A video signal containing a sync signal or  
sync and burst signal, used as a reference  
for synchronizing video equipment.  
Servolocking  
User bits  
The locking of the phase and speed of a  
VTRs head drum rotation and tape  
transport to a reference signal during  
recording and playback.  
A recordable 32-bit section in each time  
code on a video tape for recording such  
information as the recording year, month,  
and day, and the tape or program ID  
number.  
Standby-off mode  
A mode in which head drum rotation is  
stopped and tape tension is released, and  
thus the VTR is not ready for immediate  
recording and playback. This mode  
alleviates the tape and video heads from  
wear or damage.  
Vertical interval time code  
See VITC.  
VITC  
Abbreviation for Vertical Interval Time  
Code. This is a time code recorded on a  
video signal track during the vertical  
blanking interval. This VTR writes this  
time code in the AUX data area in the  
video signals. It can be read correctly even  
during slow or still picture playback. See  
also LTC.  
Standby-on mode  
A mode in which the head drum rotates  
with the tape wrapped around it, and thus  
the VTR is ready for immediate recording  
or playback. The VTR enters standby-off  
mode after remaining in standby-on mode  
for a specified length of time to prevent  
wear or damage to the tape and video  
heads.  
A-14  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into  
categories according to type of setting they perform.  
Descriptions on each item are given below:  
Items related to the hours meter (H01~)  
Items related to VTR operations (001~)  
Items related to operation panels (101~)  
Items related to the remote interface (201~)  
Items related to editing (301~)  
Items related to recording protection (501~)  
Items related to the time code (601~)  
Items related to the video control (701~)  
Items related to the audio control (801~)  
Items related to digital process (901~)  
Items related to pull down control (A01~)  
Other items (T01~)  
For details on the VTR SETUP menu, refer to 4-7-1 VTR  
SETUP Menuon page 4-61.  
Items related to prerolling (401~)  
Items Related to the Hours Meter (H01~)  
Item number  
Item  
Function  
H01  
OPERATION  
HOURS  
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been turned on and operated.  
H02  
H03  
H04  
H12  
DRUM RUNNING  
HOURS  
Displays the total number of hours that the drum has rotated with tape threaded.  
TAPE RUNNING  
HOURS  
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback, fast-forwarding,  
rewinding, jog, shuttle, variable speed, and edit modes. (Does not include still mode.)  
THREADING  
COUNTER  
Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings.  
DRUM RUNNING  
HOURS  
(resettable)  
Displays the total number of hours that the drum has run with tape threaded since last  
reset. Use this information as a guide for head-drum replacements.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1.  
H13  
H14  
TAPE RUNNING  
HOURS  
(resettable)  
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback, jog, shuttle and  
variable speed modes since last reset. (Does not include stop and still modes.) Use  
this information as a guide for replacing the fixed head and pinch rollers.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1.  
THREADING  
COUNTER  
(resettable)  
Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings since last reset.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1.  
Appendix  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to VTR Operations (001~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
001  
PRE-READ  
[off]  
Selectsthepre-read(read-before-write)modeforinsert  
editing.  
off:Nopre-readoperation  
audio/video:Carryoutpre-readeditingforbothaudioand  
video  
audio/video  
audioonly  
videoonly  
audioonly:Carryoutpre-readeditingforaudioonly  
videoonly:Carryoutpre-readeditingforvideoonly  
002  
REC INHIBIT  
select  
[off]  
all/crashREC/video  
CTL/audioCTL  
Selectstherecordinhibitmode.  
off:Recordingisenabled.(TheRECINHIBITindicatordoes  
notlight.)  
all/crash/video/audio:Recordingisinhibitedontheset  
channels.(TheRECINHIBITindicatoreitherlightsor  
goesoff.)  
Thescopeofinhibitingrecordingisdeterminedbymenu  
item003.  
003  
REC INHIBIT  
AREAselect  
[all]  
Selectsthescopetowhichinhibitingrecordingapplies.  
all:Allrecordingisinhibited.(TheRECINHIBITindicator  
lights.)  
crashREC:Thenormalrecordingmodeisinhibited.Usethis  
settingwhenyouwishtorecordinassembleeditingor  
inserteditingonly.  
crashREC  
video/CTL  
audio/CTL  
[casst]  
video/CTL:RecordingofvideoandCTLisinhibited.  
audio/CTL:RecordingofaudioandCTLisinhibited.  
[casst]:Whentherecordingprotectionplugonthecassette  
ispushedin,thissettingisdisplayed.Thissettingcannot  
beselected.  
TheRECINHIBITindicatorlightsorflashestoindicatethe  
stateoftherecordinginhibitmechanismonthecassette.  
For details, see item 104.  
004  
CAPSTANLOCK  
select  
[2FD]  
4FD  
Wheneditingorplayingbackatapewithdecoded  
componentsignals,selecttheappropriatesettingdepending  
onyourpurpose.  
2FD:Thissettinglocksthecapstanservointwo-fieldunits.  
ThisisthenormalsettingforeditingorplayingbackHD  
orD1signals.  
4LOCK: Thecapstanservoislockedtothecolorframe  
every4fields. Ifcolorframesoccurintermittentlyduring  
playback,thecapstanservoislockedwhenthenext  
colorframeappears.  
4HOLD: Thecapstanservoislockedtothecolorframe  
every4fields. Ifcolorframesoccursintermittently  
duringplayback,thecapstanservostayslockedtothat  
colorframe.  
Note  
Thissettingisonlyactivewhentheframefrequencyofthe  
unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
TolockcompositesignaloutputtofourfieldsonthisVTR,  
setitem005. toexternaland006. toexternSD.  
A-16  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
005  
SERVO/AV  
REFERENCE  
select  
[input]  
auto  
external  
Theservoreferenceisdeterminedbythefollowingmenu.  
input:ThereferencesignalisobtainedfromtheHDSDI  
INPUTconnectorsorSDTI(OPTION)INconnector.  
auto:Duringrecordingandintheeditpresetstate,the  
referencesignalisobtainedfromtheHDSDIINPUT  
connectorsorSDTI(OPTION)INconnector.  
Note  
Whenitem001isnotsettooff,thereferencesingnalis  
alwaysexternal.  
Inallothercases,theservooperatesusingthesignal  
selectedinitem006asthereferencesignal.Ifthesignal  
selectedinitem006isnotpresent,theservooperates  
usinganinternalreferencesignal.  
external:Theservoreferencesignalisalwaysexternal.  
006  
007  
EXTERNAL  
REFERENCE  
select  
[extrn HD]  
extrnSD  
Whenitem005issettoexternal,thisselectsthesignalused  
asreferencebythisunit.  
extrnHD:ThesignalinputtotheREF.INHDconnectoris  
usedasthereferencesignalforplaybackandaudio  
signalrecording.  
extrnSD:ThesignalinputtotheREF.INSDconnectoris  
usedasthereferencesignalforplaybackandaudio  
signalrecording.  
SYNC PLAY  
[off]  
on  
Thisisthemodeforautomaticcorrectionatthestartof  
playback.Insyncplaymode,forexamplewhenplayingback  
theVTRfromaprerollpoint,theINpointisreachedafter  
exactlytheprerolltimehaselapsed.  
off:Selectsnormalplaybackmode.  
on:Activatesthesyncplayfunctionforplayback.  
Note  
Insyncplaymode,thetimeafterthetapetransportstarts  
untilthevideoandsoundappearislongerthaninthenormal  
playbackmode.  
008  
LOCALFUNCTION alldisable  
Whenthisunitisusedinremotecontrolmode,thisselects  
whichbuttonsonthecontrolpaneloperate.  
alldisable:Allswitchesandbuttonsaredisabled.  
stop&eject:OnlytheSTOPandEJECTbuttonsoperate.  
allenable: AllswitchesandbuttonsexcepttheRECORDER  
andPLAYERbuttonsareenabled.  
ENABLE  
[stop & eject]  
allenable  
localkeymap  
localkeymap: Onlythebuttonsenabledinitem009are  
operational.  
Appendix  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
LOCALKEYMAP  
Enables/disablesthebuttonsonthisunitwhenitisinremote  
controlmode.  
009  
Sub items  
STOP  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheSTOPbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable:TheSTOPbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.  
PLAY  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: ThePLAYbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable: ThePLAYbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.  
REC/EDIT  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheREC/EDITbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable: TheREC/EDITbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol  
mode.  
STANDBY  
EJECT  
[disable]  
enable  
disable:TheSTANDBYbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable:TheSTANDBYbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol  
mode.  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheEJECTbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable: TheEJECTbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.  
JOG  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheJOGbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrolmode.  
enable: TheJOGbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.  
SHUTTLE  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheSHUTTLEbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable:TheSHUTTLEbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol  
mode.  
VAR  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheVARbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrolmode.  
enable: TheVARbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.  
PREROLL  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: ThePREROLLbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable: ThePREROLLbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol  
mode.  
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: ThePREVIEW/REVIEWbuttonisdisabledin  
remotecontrolmode.  
enable:ThePREVIEW/REVIEWbuttonoperatesinremote  
controlmode.  
AUTO  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheAUTObuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable: TheAUTObuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.  
INPUT CHECK  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheINPUTCHECKbuttonisdisabledinremote  
controlmode.  
enable: TheINPUTCHECKbuttonoperatesinremote  
controlmode.  
MENU&CURSOR  
AUDIO INPUT  
MONITOR  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: Themenubuttonsandthecursorcontrolbuttons  
aredisabledinremotecontrolmode.  
enable:Themenubuttonsandthecursorcontrolbuttons  
operateinremotecontrolmode.  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheAUDIOINPUTbuttonisdisabledinremote  
controlmode.  
enable: TheAUDIOINPUTbuttonoperatesinremote  
controlmode.  
[disable]  
enable  
disable: TheMONITORbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol  
mode.  
enable: TheMONITORbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol  
mode.  
A-18  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
017 PB/EESELECT  
Settable range  
Function  
Selectsoutputvideoandaudiosignals.  
MENU  
Sub items  
STAND BY OFF  
PB/MU  
[EE/EE]  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsinthestandby  
offmode.  
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio  
outputismuted.  
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
STAND BY ON  
[PB/MU]  
EE/EE  
EE/MU  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsinthestandby  
onmode.  
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio  
outputismuted.  
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
EE/MU: Theinputvideosignalisoutput. Theaudiooutput  
ismuted.  
REC  
PB/PB  
[EE/EE]  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringrecording.  
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
EDIT  
PB/PB  
[EE/EE]  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringediting.  
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
SHUTTLE  
[PB/MU]  
EE/EE  
PB/PB  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringshuttle  
playback.  
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio  
outputismuted.  
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
JOG  
VAR  
[PB/PB]  
PB/MU  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringjog  
playback.  
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio  
outputismuted.  
[PB/PB]  
PB/MU  
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringvariable”  
playback.  
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.  
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio  
outputismuted.  
018  
AUTO EJECT  
LEVEL  
[off]  
Selectstheconditionunderwhichthecassetteis  
automaticallyejectedafterbeingplayedbackforafew  
seconds.  
Whenthecassetteisejectedinaccordancewiththissetting,  
thewarningmessage17PBFREQUENCYIS  
UNSUITABLEappearsinthedisplay.  
LEVEL1  
LEVEL2  
LEVEL3  
off: Thecassetteisnotejected.  
LEVEL1: Thecassetteisejectedwhentheaudiosignalon  
thetapeisnotcompatiblewiththisVTR.  
Fordetailsonaudiosignalcompatibility,refertothe  
compatibilitytablein1-8-1.SwitchingtheSystem  
Frequencyinthesuppliedmaintenancemanual.  
LEVEL2: Thecassetteisejectedwhenthesignalonthe  
tapeisnotcompatiblewiththisVTR.However,ifthe  
differencebetweentheaudiosignalandtheVTRfield  
frequencyis±0.1%,thetapeisassumedtobe  
compatible.  
LEVEL3: Thecassetteisejectedwhenthefieldfrequency,  
PsFmode,orinterlacemodeofthetapediffersfromthat  
of the VTR.  
Appendix  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to Operation Panels (101~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
Determines how the unit is set to search mode.  
direct:Theunitenterssearchmodewhenyourotatethe  
searchdialinallmodesexceptrecordingandeditmodes.  
dial  
101  
dial direct  
via search key  
SELECTION FOR  
SEARCHDIAL  
ENABLE  
via search key: The unit enters search mode when you  
press the SHUTTLE, JOG or VAR button.  
102  
REFERENCE  
SYSTEMALARM  
off  
[on]  
Specifieswhereornottodisplayawarningwhenaudio/  
videoreferencesignalselectedinitem005.isnotpresentor  
outofphasewiththeinputvideosignal.  
off:Nowarningisdisplayed.  
on:WarningisdisplayedbyflashingSTOPbutton.  
104  
107  
REC INHIBIT  
LAMPFLASHING  
[off]  
on  
SpecifieswhethertheRECINHIBITindicatorlightsor  
flashes,whenRECinhibitplugonthebacksideofthe  
insertedcassettetapeispresseddown.  
off: TheRECINHIBITindicatorlightsup.  
on: TheRECINHIBITindicatorflashes.  
JOGDIAL  
RESPONSE  
[type1: –1 to + 1]  
type2: 2 to + 2  
type3: 2 to + 2  
Selectsthetapespeed(VTRcommand)characteristicsfor  
searchJOGdialrotation.  
TYPE1:Tapespeedchangeslinearlyinarangeof1to+1  
timesnormaltapespeed.  
TYPE2:Tapespeedchangesinarangeof2to+2times  
normaltapespeedasshownbelowinTYPE2.(Tape  
speeddoesnotchangewhenthesearchdialiswithina  
rangeof ±1timesnormaltapespeed.)  
TYPE3:Tapespeedchangeslinearlyinarangeof2to+2  
timesnormaltapespeedasshownbelowinTYPE3.  
TYPE2  
TYPE3  
+2  
speed  
FWD  
speed  
FWD  
+2  
+1  
RVS  
FWD RVS  
rotation  
FWD  
rotation  
-1  
-2  
-2  
RVS  
RVS  
109  
KEY INHIBIT  
[off]  
on  
Whenthisissettoon,theKEYINHIBITindicatorinthe  
uppercontrolpanellights,andsome,all,oragroupofthe  
followingbuttonsaredisabled:REMOTEbuttononthe  
uppercontrolpanel,AUDIOINPUT/MONITORSELECT  
button,editingoperationbuttonsonthelowercontrolpanel.  
For details of the keys and buttons disabled by this setting,  
see item 110.  
A-20  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
110  
KEY INHIBIT  
Settable range  
Function  
Theenablingordisablingofswitchesandbuttonscanbe  
independentlyspecifiedthrougheachofthefollowingsub-  
itemswhenitem109issettoon.  
SWITCH  
EFFECTIVE AREA  
Sub items  
MON./INPUT  
SEL  
[dis]  
ena  
SpecifieswhethertheINPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttons  
ontheuppercontrolpanelareenabledornot.  
1
dis :INPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttonsaredisabled.  
ena:INPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttonsareenabled.  
CONTROL  
PANEL  
[dis]  
edit  
ena  
Specifieswhichswitchesandbuttonsonthecontrolpanelof  
thisunitandtheexternalcontrolpanelconnectedtothisunit  
areenabled.  
2
dis :Allswitchesandbuttonsaredisabled.  
edit:Theswitchesandbuttonsrelatedtoeditingfunctionare  
disabled.  
ena:Allswitchesandbuttonsareenabled.  
VARIABLESPEED [off ª–1 to +2 º ]  
Setsthethetapespeedrangeduringvariable-speed(VAR)  
playbackonthecontrolpanelofthisunit.  
off (1 to +2) : The range of the tape speed is 1 to +2 times  
normalspeed.  
111  
LIMIT IN KEY  
on ( 0 to +1)  
PANELCONTROL  
on (0 to +1) : The range of the tape speed is 0 to +1 time  
normalspeed.  
112  
113  
CTL LOCK IN  
VAR/SHTL  
[off]  
1/0.5/0.5/1.0/2.0  
CTLlocksthetapetransportduringvariable-speedplayback  
orshuttleplayback.  
off:CTLdoesnotlock.  
1/0.5/0.5/1.0/2.0:CTLlocksthetapetransportatspeeds  
of 1, 0.5, 0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 times normal speed.  
DT MODE  
[field ª–1 to +1 º ]  
frame  
SetstheDToperationmode.  
field :(1to+1):Entersthefieldplaybackmode(FieldDT  
mode)whenthetapespeedis1to+1timesnormal  
speed.  
Enterstheframeplaybackmode(FlameDTmode)when  
thetapespeedis+1to+2timesnormalspeed.  
frame:Enterstheframeplaybackmode(FrameDTmode).  
114  
POWER-ON MENU [home menu]  
Selectsthemenudisplayedwhentheunitispoweredon.  
select  
TCmenu  
CUEmenu  
PF1menu  
PF2menu  
ALT+PF1menu  
ALT+PF2menu  
115  
116  
117  
KEYBEEP  
high  
low  
Selectsthevolumeofthekeyclicksound.  
Selectsthevolumeofthekeyclicksound.  
[off]  
ALARMBEEP  
SCREEN SAVER  
[high]  
low  
off  
3min  
10min  
60min  
[off]  
Selectsthetimeafterwhichthescreensaverfunction  
operates.  
118  
INPUT GUARD  
select  
[off]  
SelectsthemodeinwhichtheINPUTSELECTbuttonson  
thefrontpanelswitchvideoandaudioinputs.  
on  
off:TheINPUTSELECTbuttonsonthefrontpanelcan  
switchthevideoandaudioinputs.  
on:TheINPUTSELECTbuttonsonthefrontpanelare  
inhibitedfromswitchingthevideoandaudioinputs.  
However,itispossibletochecktheINPUTSELECT  
display,andtocarryoutMONITORSELECTswitching.  
Appendix  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
120  
WARNING  
DISPLAY  
[off]  
on  
Selectswhetherwarningmessagesshouldbedisplayedin  
thelowerpartofthetimecodedisplayfortheHOMEmenu,  
the TC menu, the PF1 menu, and the PF2 menu.  
off:Donotdisplaywarningmessages.  
on:Displaywarningmessages.  
Notes  
NowarningmessagesaredisplayedfortheCUEmenu,so  
checkbyviewingamenuotherthantheCUEmenu.  
IfLOSTLOCKoccursduringplaybackorrecording,a  
LOSTLOCKwarningmessageisalwaysdisplayed.  
121  
INFORMATION  
DISPLAY  
Selectsitemstobedisplayedintheoperationinformation.  
Sub items  
SYSTEM  
FREQUENCY  
[off]  
diff  
ever  
off:Doesnotdisplaythefieldfrequencyofboththeunitand  
thetape.  
diff:Displaysthefieldfrequencyoftheunitandthetapeonly  
whentheydonotmatch.  
ever:Alwaysdisplaysthefieldfrequencyoftheunitandthe  
tape.  
off:Doesnotdisplaytheeffectivescanninglinenumberto  
beinputorplayedback,andtobeoutput.  
ACTIVE LINE (HD)  
[off]  
diff  
diff:Displaystheeffectivescanninglinenumbertobeinput  
andtooutputonlywhentheydonotmatch.  
ever:Alwaysdisplaystheeffectivescanninglinenumberto  
beinputandoutput.  
ever  
EOSDISPLAY  
VIDEO INT SG  
[off]  
on  
off:DoesnotdisplayEOS.  
on:DisplaysEOS.  
[off]  
on  
off:Doesnotdisplaythetypeofthetestsignalgeneratedby  
theinternalvideotestsignalgenerator.  
on:Displaythetypeofthetestsignalgeneratedbythe  
internalvideotestsignalgenerator.  
off:Doesnotdisplaytheoperatingstatusoftheinternal  
audiotestsignalgenerator.  
on:Displaystheoperatingstatusoftheinternalaudiotest  
signalgenerator.  
AUDIO INT SG  
METADATA  
[off]  
on  
[off]  
on  
Selectswhetherthereceptionsetting(bankname)forthe  
metadatamultiplexedintheHDSDIpacketisdisplayedor  
not.  
off:Thebanknameisnotdisplayed.  
on:Thebanknameisdisplayed.  
[on]  
off  
MULTI CUE  
CLEARbyinject  
Selectswhethertoerasecuepointdatainmulti-cuemode  
whenacassetteisinserted.  
on:Erasecuepointdata.  
122  
123  
off:Donoterasecuepointdata.  
Tele-File  
[control panel]  
CONTROL MODE RS-232C  
SelectsthedevicetobeusedforTELEFILEmenu  
operations.  
controlpanel:ThecontrolpaneloftheVTRisused.  
RS-232C:ApersonalcomputerconnectedtotheRS-232C  
connectoroftheVTRisused.  
124  
125  
Tele-FileMENU  
autopopup  
[off]  
on  
SpecifieswhetherornottheTELEFILEmenuappears  
automaticallywhenacassettewithamemorylabelis  
inserted.  
off: TheTELEFILEmenudoesnotappear.  
on: TheTELEFILEmenuappears.  
[not clear]  
whenformat  
Tele-FileTHREAD  
COUNTERclear  
mode  
Specifieswhetherornotthethreadcounterisresetwhena  
memorylabelisformatted.  
notclear:Thethreadcounterisnotreset.  
whenformat:Thethreadcounterisreset.  
A-22  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Items Related to Remote Interface (201~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
201  
REMOTE 9-PIN  
[off]  
Whenthisissettoon,thisunitiscontrolledfromthe  
deviceconnectedtotheREMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P)  
connectors.  
on  
Note  
Whenthisunitiscontrolledbyadeviceconnectedtothe  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P) or PARALLEL I/O 1-IN(50P)  
connectors,theeditingcontrolbuttonsandallofthetape  
transportbuttonsexceptSTOPandEJECTaredisabled.It  
isalsopossibletomakeasettingsothatallofthebuttons  
aredisabled.  
For details, see item 008.  
202  
203  
REMOTE 50-PIN  
[off]  
Whenthisissettoon,thisunitiscontrolledfromthe  
deviceconnectedtotheREMOTEPARALLELI/O(50P)  
connector(optionalBKDW-509).  
on  
PARALLEL  
RUNNING  
[disable]  
enable  
SelectswhethertwoormoreVTRscanbeoperated  
synchronized.  
disable:Synchronizedoperationisnotcarriedout.  
enable:Synchronizedoperationisenabled.  
Note  
Forsynchronizedoperationtobepossible,item203must  
besettoenableonalloftheconnectedVTRs.  
Appendix  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to Editing (301~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number  
Item  
Function  
Settable range  
301  
EDIT OPERATION  
MODE  
film  
CG  
[normal]  
Selects the animation edit mode. For normal editing, use the  
normalsetting.  
film: Selects editing in field units for film recording. Since the  
standard film speed is 24 frames/sec and VTR frame  
rate is 30 frames/sec when the frame frequency is 29.97  
Hz or 30 Hz, the duration must be alternated between 2  
and 3 fields when recording films. This setting is  
automatically activated in film mode. When editing  
finishes, the next IN and OUT points are automatically  
set.  
Note  
This setting is only active when the frame frequency of  
the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
CG: Primarily for recording computer graphics, this setting  
allows editing by individual frames. When the edit is  
completed, the OUT point automatically becomes the  
next IN point. The next OUT point is automatically set  
one frame ahead of the IN point.  
normal: Use this setting for normal insert editing.  
302  
303  
304  
PREROLL TIME  
POSTROLL TIME  
0 sec  
This sets the preroll time. The range is from 0 to 30  
seconds, in steps of 1 second. The preroll time should  
generally be set to at least 3 seconds, and for phase  
adjustment with an editing controller it is recommended to  
set the preroll time to at least 5 seconds.  
.
.
.
[5 sec]  
.
.
.
30 sec  
0 sec  
This sets the postroll time for which the tape transport  
keeps moving after reaching an OUT point.  
The range is from 0 to 30 seconds, in steps of 1 second.  
.
.
.
[2 sec]  
.
.
.
30 sec  
VAR SPEED RANGE  
FOR  
SYNCHRONIZATION  
[–1 to +2]  
1.15 to +2.45  
Specifies the variable tape speed range when the variable  
speed playback is executed by a remote control unit  
connected to the REMOTE1 IN (9P) connector.  
1 to +2: 1 to +2 times normal tape speed  
1.15 to +2.45: 1.15 to +2.45 times normal tape speed  
Note  
When an editing control unit such as BVE-9100 is  
connected for DT editing, select “–1.15 to +2.45.  
305  
EDIT FIELD select  
[1F]  
2F  
Selects the start timing for editing when performing tape  
editing.  
1F/2F  
1F: Start editing from field 1 and end on field 2.  
2F: Start editing from field 2 and end on field 1.  
1F/2F: Following received timing commands.  
Note  
When the system frequency of this unit is PsF mode, the  
unit always operates with the F1 setting.  
306  
SYNCHRONIZE  
[accurate]  
rough  
off  
When this unit is used as a controller for editing control of  
another VTR connected through a 9-pin remote cable, this  
selects whether or not to carry out phase synchronization of  
the two VTRs, and also the editing accuracy when carrying  
out synchronization.  
accurate: Editing is carried out with an accuracy of ±0  
frames.  
rough: Editing is carried out with an accuracy of ±1 frame.  
off: Synchronization is not carried out.  
A-24  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
Items 311 through 315 describe the analog audio edit preset  
during editing mentioned on right.  
The follwing items specifies the allocation of each channel  
for the analog audio preset of the editor or remote controller  
when the digital audio signals from the VTR is edited on an  
editor (BVE-600, etc.) or remote controller with digital audio  
edit preset control functions.  
311  
ANALOG AUDIO  
EDIT PRESET  
REPLACE FOR  
CH 1  
no definition  
[analog ch 1]  
Sets the channel-1 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF  
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor  
or remote controller.  
analog ch 2  
analog ch 1 + ch 2  
no definition: Not defined.  
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.  
analog ch 2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit  
preset.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2 : As determined by analog channel 1 or  
analog channel 2 preset.  
312  
ANALOG AUDIO  
EDIT PRESET  
REPLACE FOR  
CH 2  
no definition  
analog ch 1  
[analog ch 2]  
Sets the channel-2 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF  
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor  
or remote controller.  
no definition: Not defined.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2  
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit  
preset.  
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit  
preset.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2: As determined by analog channel 1 or  
analog channel 2 preset.  
313  
314  
315  
ANALOG AUDIO  
EDIT PRESET  
REPLACE FOR  
CH 3  
[no definition]  
analog ch 1  
analog ch 2  
Sets the channel-3 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF  
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor  
or remote controller.  
no definition: Not defined.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2  
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.  
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2: As determined by analog channel 1 or  
analog channel 2 preset.  
ANALOG AUDIO  
EDIT PRESET  
REPLACE FOR  
CH 4  
[no definition]  
analog ch 1  
analog ch 2  
Sets the channel-4 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF  
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor  
or remote controller.  
no definition: Not defined.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2  
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.  
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2 : As determined by analog channel 1 or  
analog channel 2 preset.  
ANALOG AUDIO  
EDIT PRESET  
REPLACE FOR  
CUE  
[no definition]  
analog ch 1  
analog ch 2  
Sets the analog audio channel (longitudinal) edit preset of  
the VTR to ON or OFF according to the analog audio preset  
specified on an editor or remote controller.  
no definition: Not defined.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2  
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.  
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.  
analog ch 1 + ch 2: As determined by analog channel 1 or  
analog ch 2 preset.  
Appendix  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
cut edit  
[cross fade]  
fade in/out  
Specifies the type of editing for digital audio signals.  
cut edit: Cut editing (discontinuity in audio signal may result  
at the join, causing noise.)  
317  
AUDIO EDIT  
MODE  
cross fade: Cross-fade (see figure below.)  
fade in/out: Fade-out and fade-in (see figure below.)  
IN  
OUT  
CROSS FADE  
PB  
INPUT  
t
t
OUT  
IN  
FADE IN/OUT  
PB  
INPUT  
t
t
Note  
The tin the figures above is the time set by item 811.  
When editing non-audio data, be sure to select cut edit.”  
Noise may be produced during the editing of certain non-  
audio data.  
318  
EDIT RETRY  
off  
[on]  
Set this item when the VTR is used as a recorder during  
VTR-to-VTR editing. Specifies the action taken when the  
recorder fails to synchronize with the player VTR.  
off: Editing is not executed and the VTR enters STOP mode.  
on: The VTR automatically repeats the editing again (not  
more than twice).  
320  
321  
PLAY COMMAND 30 frame  
This adjusts the time in frames required between the issue  
of a playback command and this unit actually beginning the  
execution of the command. This adjustment is useful for  
synchronization between VTRs with widely differing start-up  
timing.  
.
.
.
DELAY START  
TIME  
[0 frame]  
.
.
.
+30 frame  
VIDEO PREVIEW  
MODE  
During a preview operation, this selects the video signals  
that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output  
connectors.  
[VVV]  
VBV  
VVV: VIDEO-VIDEO-VIDEO: In the editing interval the  
monitored signal is the player video signal or video input  
(EE) signal.  
VBV: VIDEO-BLACK-VIDEO: In the editing interval the  
monitored signal is a black signal.  
322  
[SSS]  
AUDIO PREVIEW  
MODE  
During a preview operation, this selects the audio signals  
that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output  
connectors.  
SMS  
SSS: SOUND-SOUND-SOUND: In the editing interval the  
monitored signal is the player audio signal or audio  
input (EE) signal.  
SMS: SOUND-MUTE-SOUND: In the editing interval the  
audio signal is muted.  
A-26  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Items Related to Prerolling (401~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
401  
[stop]  
still  
FUNCTION MODE  
AFTER CUE-UP  
Selects the operation mode that the VTR changes to after  
completing a cue up operation.  
stop: Enters stop mode.  
still: Enters still-picture mode (search mode).  
Note  
When setting the standard constant on the editor and  
control the unit, set to stop.”  
403  
404  
CUEUP BY TC  
capstan only  
[reel/capstan]  
This setting is only active when item 602. is set to TC or  
UBIT.  
capstan only: The tape runs with the pinch ON during cue  
up. (The maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape  
speed.)  
reel/capstan: The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during  
cue up. When the tape nears the cue up point and tape  
speed drops to slow, the pinch turns ON.  
CUEUP BY CTL  
[capstan only]  
reel/capstan  
This setting is only active when item 602. is set to CTL.  
capstan only: The tape runs with the pinch ON state during  
cue up. (The maximum tape speed is ten times normal  
tape speed.)  
reel/capstan: The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during  
cue up. When the tape nears the cue up point and tape  
speed drops to slow, the pinch turns ON.  
When this unit is controlled by an editor (BVE-2000/BVE-  
9100, etc), and the seting is reel/capstan, cue up  
operations are done at high speed.  
Select capstan onlywhen editing precision has priority.  
405  
406  
CUE MENU  
DEFAULT MODE  
select  
[page mode]  
Selects the default mode when the CUE menu is opened.  
page mode: PAGE mode  
extend mode: EXTEND mode  
extend mode  
CUE MENU  
PREROLL  
OFFSET  
[0 sec]  
Sets the preroll time for a cueing up operation from the  
CUE menu.  
.
.
.
30 sec  
407  
[off]  
Selects the rewind mode for the end of the tape.  
off: The tape transport stops at the end of the tape.  
on: The tape is automatically rewound from the end of the  
tape.  
AUTO REWIND  
on  
Appendix  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to Recording Protection (501~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
STILL TIMER  
0.5 sec  
5 sec  
Select the amount of time after which the VTR to  
automatically enters tape-protect mode, for the purpose of  
protecting the video head and tape.  
This is the time between stopping of the tape (stop mode or  
still-picture mode in search mode) and the change to tape-  
protection mode.  
501  
10 sec  
20 sec  
30 sec  
40 sec  
50 sec  
1 min  
The selectable range of time is from 0.5 second to 30  
minutes.  
2 min  
3 min  
4 min  
5 min  
6 min  
7 min  
[8 min]  
30 min  
502  
TAPE  
PROTECTION  
MODE SEARCH  
[step fwd]  
standby off  
tension release  
Specifies the tape-protect mode the VTR changes from still-  
picture mode while searching.  
The unit enters automatically the specified tape-protect  
mode after the time specified in item 501 has elapsed.  
step fwd: A two-second step advance is repeated in forward  
direction at 1/30 times normal tape speed.  
standby off: The VTR enters standby off mode (standby is  
canceled).  
tension release: The VTR enters tension release mode  
(tape tension is released).  
503  
TAPE  
[standby off]  
tension release  
Specifies the tape-protect mode the VTR changes to from  
the stop mode.  
The unit automatically enters the specified tape-protect  
mode after the elapse of time specified by the item 501.  
standby off: The VTR enters standby off mode (standby is  
canceled).  
PROTECTION  
MODE FROM  
STOP  
tension release: The VTR enters tension release mode  
(tape tension is released).  
504  
505  
DRUM ROTATION [off]  
IN STANDBY OFF on  
Sets the drum rotation to on or off during standby-off mode.  
off: Drum rotation is stopped.  
on: Drum rotation continues.  
STILL TENSION  
[normal]  
loose  
Sets the tape tension control in still-picture mode.  
normal: Maintains the tape tension that ensures uneffected  
playback even in still-picture mode.  
(This is the normal setting for VTR operations.)  
loose: Sets the tape tension lower than that of the normal”  
setting after the VTR enters still-picture mode. In this  
case, picture playback is not ensured. (For long  
standbys (e.g., LMS) in still-picture mode, this setting is  
recommended.)  
A-28  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Items Related to the Time Code (601~)  
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
601  
DF/NDF MODE  
select  
[drop frame]  
non-drop frame  
auto  
Selects the timing mode for the time code generator and the  
CTL counter.  
drop frame: drop frame mode (DFindication)  
non-drop frame: non-drop frame mode (NDFindication)  
auto: Drop frame / non-drop frame mode is selected  
automatically on the basis of the frame frequency of the  
unit. For 29.97 Hz drop frame mode is selected, and for  
30 Hz non-drop frame mode is selected. The setting of  
the frame frequency mode is carried out with the  
[MAINTENANCE]/[F9]/(OTHERS CHECK/SYSTEM)  
buttons.  
Note  
This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the  
unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
When the [F7](TCG MODE) key is set to regene, the time  
code generator is synchronized to the playback time code,  
and therefore this setting is disabled.  
602  
TIMER MODE  
select  
CTL  
[TC]  
Selects the mode for displaying time data.  
CTL: During playback the CTL signal recorded on the tape,  
or during recording the CTL signal being recorded on the  
tape, is counted, and the tape running time is displayed  
in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.  
UBIT  
TC: The time code value read by the time code reader, or  
the time code value generated by the time code  
generator is displayed. Use item 603. to toggle between  
VITC and LTC.  
UBIT: The user bits inserted in the playback time code, or  
the user bits inserted in the being recorded are  
displayed. Use item 603. to toggle between VITC and  
LTC.  
603  
604  
[LTC]  
auto  
VITC  
TCR MODE select  
Selects the time code read by the time code reader during  
playback.  
LTC: LTC is read.  
auto: If the playback speed is from 1/2 to +1/2 normal  
speed, VITC is read, and if outside this range LTC is  
read.  
VITC: VITC is read.  
+/12H  
[24H]  
TAPE TIMER  
DISPLAY  
Selects whether the CTL counter operates in 12-hour  
display mode or 24-hour display mode.  
+/12H: 12-hour display mode  
24H: 24-hour display mode  
Note  
In the ±12-hour display, the tens digit of the hours value is  
dropped.  
[TCG]  
V IN  
605  
VITC SOURCE  
Selects the source for VITC to be written to the AUX data  
area of video signals.  
TCG: Write the signals generated by this units internal time  
code generator to the VITC.  
V IN: Write the VITC of video signals input to this unit to the  
VITC.  
Appendix  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Settable range  
Function  
Item number  
Item  
606  
TCG MODE select [preset]  
Selects the time code to which the internal time code  
generator synchronizes.  
preset: By an operation on the front panel or by remote  
control from a device connected to the REMOTE 1-IN  
(9P) connector, the initial value of the time code  
generated by the internal time code generator can be  
preset.  
regene  
auto  
regene: The internal time code generator is synchronized  
(regene) to the time code values read by the internal  
time code generator.  
auto: Operates in regene mode when either assemble or  
insert mode is selected and operates in preset mode  
when any other mode is selected.  
607  
TCG REGENE  
SOURCE select  
[int-LTC]  
int-VITC  
ext-LTC  
ext-VITC  
If item 606 is set to regene,this selects the source of the  
synchronization of the time code generated internally.  
int-LTC: When the time code played back from the time  
code track on the tape is used.  
int-VITC: When the time code played back from the AUX  
datain the video signal on the tape is used.  
ext-LTC: When the external time code input to the TIME  
CODE IN connector is used.  
ext-VITC: When the external time code input to the HD SDI  
INPUT connector is used.  
&
[TC UB]  
608  
609  
TCG/UBG  
REGENE MODE  
Selects the regenerate signal when the time code generator  
is in regenerate mode (when item 606. is set to regene) or  
during auto edit mode.  
TC & UB: The time code signal and user bits signal are both  
regenerated.  
TC: The time code signal is regenerated.  
UB: The user bits signal is regenerated.  
TC  
UB  
REC RUN/FREE  
RUN select  
[free run]  
This selects the way in which the time code advances.  
free run: Regardless of the operating mode of this unit, the  
time code advances all the time that the power is on.  
rec run: The time code advances only during recording.  
rec run  
Note  
When using this setting, set item 606. to preset.  
610  
611  
VITC (SD)  
[off]  
Selects whether or not to insert VITC data in the HD-SD  
converter output.  
off: VITC data is inserted.  
on  
on: VITC data is not inserted.  
VITC POSITION-1 12 line  
select (NTSC)  
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is  
installed and 29.97PsF/59.94i mode is selected on the  
VTR, this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC  
signal is inserted.  
.
.
.
[16 line]  
.
.
.
20 line  
It can be inserted in any lines from 12 to 20.  
Note  
Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.  
612  
12 line  
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is  
installed and 29.97PsF/59.94i mode is selected on the  
VTR, this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC  
signal is inserted.  
VITC POSITION-2  
select (NTSC)  
.
.
.
[18 line]  
.
.
.
20 line  
It can be inserted in any lines from 12 to 20.  
Note  
Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.  
A-30  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
613  
TC OUTPUT  
SIGNAL IN  
REGENE MODE  
[off tape]  
regene  
through  
Specifies the signal output to the TIME CODE OUT  
connector when the internal time code generator is in a  
mode for regenerating the playback time code (i.e. during  
auto edit mode or when item 607. is set to int-LTC or int-  
VITC and item 606. is set to regene.)  
off tape: The playback time code signal is output to the  
TIME CODE OUT connector without regeneration.  
regene: The playback time code signal is output to the  
TIME CODE OUT connector after regeneration only  
when the VTR is in playback mode.  
through: The playback time code signal is output.  
614  
615  
PHASE  
CORRECTION  
[off]  
on  
Specifies whether the phase correction control of the LTC  
signal generated by the time code generator is applied or  
not.  
off: The phase correction control is not applied.  
on: The phase correction control is applied.  
TCG CF FLAG  
[off]  
on  
auto  
Specfies whether the color frame (CF) flag is set (ON) or  
not set (OFF) in the blank bit of the time code data.  
off: Color frame flag is set OFF.  
on: Color frame flag is set ON.  
auto: Color frame flag is set ON or OFF depending on the  
phase relationship of the color framing between the  
recorded video signal and the time code signal.  
Note  
When this item is set to auto, the color frame flag is  
determined by the operating mode of the time code  
generator.  
When PRESET mode (i.e., item 606 is set to preset and  
the VTR is in a mode other than automatic edit mode), the  
time code signal is generated with color flame-locked to  
the video signal, and the color frame flag is ON.  
When REGENE mode (i.e., item 606 is set to regene or  
the VTR is in automatic edit mode), color frame flag is  
OFF.  
616  
617  
620  
VITC POSITION-1 9,322 line  
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is  
installed and 25PsF/50i mode is selected on the VTR, this  
setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is  
inserted.  
.
.
.
select (PAL)  
[19,332 line]  
.
.
.
22,335 line  
It can be inserted in any lines from 9,322 to 22,335.  
Note  
Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.  
VITC POSITION-2 9,322 line  
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is  
installed and 25PsF/50i mode is selected on the VTR, this  
setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is  
inserted.  
.
.
.
[21,334 line]  
select (PAL)  
.
.
.
22,335 line  
It can be inserted in any lines from 9,322 to 22,335.  
Note  
Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.  
[off]  
SUPERIMPOSED  
CHARACTER  
Specifies whether or not to superimpose time data and  
operating status information on the signal output from the  
MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV.  
OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector and the  
3 (SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION).  
off: No information is superimposed.  
on  
on: Information is superimposed.  
Appendix  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
622  
CHARACTER H-  
POSITION  
0
Sets the horizontal position of text information  
.
.
.
[8]  
superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR  
connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV. OUT  
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector, the 3  
(SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) and  
the PULL DOWN OUT connectors. A setting of 0 displays  
the information at the left edge of the screen, and the  
position moves to the right as the setting is increased. There  
are 16 possible settings, from 0 to 15  
.
.
.
15  
623  
CHARACTER V-  
POSITION  
0
Sets the vertical position of text information superimposed  
on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of HD  
SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE  
(SUPER) connector, the 3 (SUPER) connector of D CONV.  
SDI OUT (OPTION) and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.  
A setting of 0 displays the information at the bottom of the  
screen, and the position moves up as the setting is  
.
.
.
[22]  
.
.
.
23  
increased. There are 24 possible settings, from 0 to 23.  
Note  
If two-line display is selected in item 626., sometimes the  
second line will disappear in the middle of the screen.  
624  
CHARACTER  
TYPE  
without BG  
outlined  
translucent  
[withBG]  
Sets the style of text information such as time codes output  
from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D  
CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector,  
the 3 (SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)  
and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.  
without BG: White characters, with no background.  
outlined: White characters outlined in black.  
translucent: White characters on a gray screen background.  
with BG: White characters on a black background.  
Note  
For the D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and D  
CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER)  
TYconnector, the translucentsetting is automatically  
changed to with BG.  
625  
626  
CHARACTER SIZE  
Sets the size of text information such as time codes output  
from the MONITOR of HD SDI OUTPUT connector, the D  
CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector,  
3 (SUPER) of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and  
the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.  
× 1  
[x 2]  
× 3  
× 1: Normal size.  
× 2: Twice normal size.  
× 3: Three times normal size.  
When item 620 is set to on, this setting specifies the  
content of text information output from the MONITOR  
connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV. OUT  
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector, the 3  
(SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) and  
the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.  
DISPLAY  
INFORMATION  
select  
time data & status  
time data & UB  
time data & CTL  
time data & VITC  
[time data only]  
time data & status: Timer counter display and status  
information.  
time data & UB: Timer counter display and user bits.  
time data & CTL: Timer counter display and CTL.  
time data & VITC: Timer counter display and VITC.  
time data only: Timer counter display only.  
A-32  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number  
Item  
Settable range  
Function  
627  
CHAR WARNING  
DISPLAY at dual  
line mode  
[off]  
on  
When item 626 is set to anything other than time data only,  
this item specifies whether warning messages flash on the  
second line or not.  
off: Warning messages do not flash.  
on: If a warning message exists, it flashes.  
Notes  
Messages that have been cleared are not displayed. For  
more information about clearing warning messages, see  
Clearing warning messageson page A-12.  
When there are multiple warning messages, each  
message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next  
message.  
REMAIN TIME  
DISPLAY  
[off]  
10min  
on  
628  
Sets whether to display remaining time on the tape in  
superimposed charecter position.  
off: Do not display remaining time.  
10 min: Display remaining time when it is 10 minutes or  
less.  
on: Always display remaining time.  
Notes  
The remaining time on the tape is not displayed when no  
cassette is inserted. The remaining time is not also  
displayed until the VTR finishes detecting the diameter of  
the wound tape and estimating the remaining time  
immediately after the cassette is inserted.  
630  
TC CONVERSION [off]  
Specifies whether or not to convert the 24 frames time code  
to the 25 frames time code when off-speed playing back the  
cassette tape recorded in the 24F mode with the 25F mode.  
off: Does not convert the 24 frames time code to the 25  
frames time code.  
at 25F off-speed  
on  
PB  
on: Converts the 24 frames time code to the 25 frames time  
code.  
Note  
This setting is only active when the field frequency is 25 Hz.  
631  
632  
ORIGINAL TC  
display  
When item 630 is set to on,this setting specifies whether  
the 24-frame time code is displayed or not on the control  
panel of the VTR before conversion.  
off: The 24-frame time code is not displayed before  
conversion.  
on: The 24-frame time code is displayed before conversion.  
The type of time code type displayed is specified by item  
603.  
[off]  
on  
JUMPING TC  
select  
[–3H]  
2H  
1H  
+1H  
+2H  
+3H  
0H  
When the 24-frame time code is converted to 25-frame time  
code, this setting specifies the loopback point (JUMPING  
TC) with respect to the reference point for conversion  
(STARTING TC).  
3H: The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours before STARTING  
TC.  
2H: The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours before STARTING  
TC.  
1H: The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour before STARTING TC.  
+1H: The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour after STARTING TC.  
+2H: The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours after STARTING TC.  
+3H: The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours after STARTING TC.  
0H: The JUMPING TC is set 1 frame before STARTING TC.  
Appendix  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to the Video Control (701~)  
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
701  
VIDEO INPUT  
select  
[SDI]  
SDTI  
Selectstheinputvideosignal.  
SDI: The SDI video signal input to the HD SDI INPUT  
connectors.  
SDTI(OnlywhentheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoardis  
insalled.):TheSDTIvideosignal(270Mbps)inputtothe  
SDTI(OPTION)INconnector.  
706  
707  
FORCED  
[auto]  
forcedYADDoff  
SpecifieswhetherY-addoperationmodeisautomatically  
turnedonduringDTplaybackornot.  
auto:Y-addoperationmodeisautomaticallyturnedon.  
forcedYADDoff:Y-addoperationmodeisoffallthetime.  
SpecifieswhetherornotA-ROUNDING1) performed.  
simple:A-ROUNDINGisnotused.10bitinputsignals  
changedto8bitsbynormalrounding(roundingdown  
numbersof4orlessandroundingupnumbersof5or  
more).  
VERTICAL  
INTERPOLATION  
OFF  
ROUNDING  
[simple]  
adaptive  
adaptive:A-ROUNDINGisapplied.10bitsignalsare  
roundedto8bits.  
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD  
SDIOUTPUTconnectors.SimultaneouslyadjuststheY,P  
708  
709  
MASTERLEVEL  
(HD)  
0.0% (0H)  
.
.
.
B,  
andP levels.  
R
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
0.0% (0H)  
Y LEVEL (HD)  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD  
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. AdjuststheYlevelofthevideo  
signal.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) A-ROUNDING™  
A method for rounding a 10 bit signal to 8 bits. This  
process suppresses step noise that occurs when lines  
which differ slightly from the horizontal are displayed.  
A-ROUNDING is a trademark of Sony Corp.  
A-34  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
710  
711  
712  
713  
P
B
LEVEL (HD)  
0.0% (0H)  
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. AdjuststheP  
signal.  
B
levelofthevideo  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
0.0% (0H)  
P
R
LEVEL (HD)  
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. AdjuststheP  
signal.  
R
levelofthevideo  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
SETUPLEVEL  
(HD)  
preset:0  
10.0  
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD  
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. Adjuststhesetuplevelofthe  
videosignal.  
.
.
.
[0.0]  
.
.
.
10.0  
SYNC PHASE (HD) 128  
preset:0  
ControlstheHsyncphaseoftheHDvideosignaloutput  
fromtheHDSDIOUTPUTconnectors,accordingtothe  
menu.  
.
.
.
[0]  
.
.
.
127  
714  
720  
FINE (HD)  
preset:0  
[0]  
ControlstheHsyncphaseoftheHDvideosignaloutput  
fromtheHDSDIOUTPUTconnectors,accordingtothe  
menu.  
.
.
.
1024  
EFFECT EDIT  
MODE  
[off]  
on  
Applieseffecteditmodeforeditingspecialeffectsorfor  
dubbingatapewithanattenuatedsignal-to-noiseratio.  
off:Fornormaleditingordubbing.  
on:Forrepeatededitingofspecialeffectsorfordubbinga  
tapewithahighlyattenuatedsignal-to-noiseratio.  
730  
ACTIVE LINE 1035 1080÷1035(CONV)  
WhentheHKDV-502HDLineConverterBoardisinstalled,  
selectstheconversionmodeoftheeffectivescanningline  
number.  
CONVERT MODE  
1080÷1035(CROP)  
1080÷1035(CONV):Converttheeffectivescanningline  
numberfrom1080to1035preservingtheaspectratioof  
theimage.  
1080÷1035(CROP):Converttheeffectivescanningline  
numberfrom1080to1035. Thefoursidesoftheimage  
arecropped,thenitishorizontallyexpanded.  
731  
ACTIVE LINE 1080 1035÷1080(CONV)  
WhentheHKDV-502HDLineConverterBoardisinstalled,  
selectstheconversionmodeoftheeffectivescanningline  
number.  
CONVERT MODE  
1035÷1080(PANEL)  
1035÷1080(CONV):Converttheeffectivescanningline  
numberfrom1035to1080preservingtheaspectratioof  
theimage.  
1035÷1080(PANEL):Converttheeffectivescanningline  
numberfrom1035to1080. The1035linesoftheimage  
areinsertedintothe1035linesof1080lines,thenitis  
horizontallycompressed.  
732  
SLOW PROCESS [on]  
WhentheHKDV-502HDLineConverterBoardisinstalled,  
selectswhetherornottoactivatethefunctiontoimprovethe  
verticalresolutionduringslow-motionplayback.  
on:Activatethefunctiontoimprovetheverticalresolution  
duringslow-motionplayback.  
MODE  
off  
off:Donotactivatethefunctiontoimprovethevertical  
resolutionduringslow-motionplayback.  
Note  
ThissettinghasnoeffectwhentheVTRisoperatedinPsF  
mode.  
Appendix  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
754  
755  
756  
757  
758  
759  
DOWNCONVERTER [EDGE-CROP]  
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is  
installed, selects the mode  
EDGE-CROP: Selects edge crop mode.  
LETTER BOX: Selects letter box mode.  
MODE  
LETTER BOX  
SQUEEZE  
SQUEEZE: Selects squeeze mode.  
MASTERLEVEL  
(D1)  
0.0% (0H)  
Adjusts the level of the high D1 video signal output from D  
CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Simultaneously adjusts  
the Y, BY, and RY level.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
0.0% (0H)  
Y LEVEL (D1)  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV.  
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Simultaneously adjusts the Y  
levels.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
0.0% (0H)  
BY LEVEL (D1)  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV.  
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Adjusts the BY level of the  
video signal.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
0.0% (0H)  
RY LEVEL (D1)  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV.  
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Adjusts the RY level of the  
video signal.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
0.0% (0H)  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
LEVEL (D2)  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
Adjusts the video level of the D2 video signal output from D  
CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog composite  
video signal output from D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE  
(SUPER) connector.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
A-36  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
760  
CHROMALEVEL  
(D2)  
preset:100%  
(4000H)  
0.0% (0H)  
Adjusts the chroma level of the D2 video signal output from  
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog  
composite video signal output from D CONV. OUT  
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector.  
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]  
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)  
761  
762  
763  
HUE (D2)  
preset:0  
30  
Adjusts the hue of the D2 video signal output from D CONV.  
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog composite video  
signal output from D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE  
(SUPER) connector.  
.
.
.
[0]  
.
.
.
30  
SETUPLEVEL  
(D2)  
preset:7.5IRE  
0.0  
Adjusts the setup level of the D2 video signal output from D  
CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog  
composite video signal output from D CONV. OUT  
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector.  
.
.
.
[7.5]  
.
.
.
10.0  
SYNC PHASE (SD)  
preset:0  
128  
Adjusts the sync phase of the D1/D2 video signal output  
from D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connectors and analog  
composite video signal output from D CONV. OUT  
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector.  
.
.
.
[0]  
.
.
.
127  
764  
765  
FINE (SD)  
preset:0  
[0]  
Makes fine adjustments to the sync phase of the D1/D2  
video signal output from D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)  
connectors and analog composite video signal output from  
D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER)  
connector.  
.
.
.
1024  
CROSS COLOR  
preset:8  
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.  
.
.
.
[8]  
.
.
.
15  
766  
767  
H CROP POSITION  
preset:0  
120  
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,ad juststheimageenhancer. Adjust stheHcr op”  
(croppingpositioninthehorizontaldirectionwhenusing  
edgecropmode).  
.
.
.
[0]  
.
.
.
120  
DETAILGAIN  
preset:32  
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,ad juststheimageenhance r.Adjuststhedegreeof  
edgeenhancement.  
.
.
.
[32]  
.
.
.
127  
768  
769  
LIMITER  
preset:32  
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,ad juststheimageenhancer .Adjust sthemaxi mum  
levelofthe detailaddedtoenhancetheoriginalsignal.  
.
.
.
[32]  
.
.
.
63  
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,ad juststheimageenhancer.Setstheamplitude  
fornotenhancingsmall-amplitudesignals.  
CRISP THRESHOLD  
preset:0  
[0]  
.
.
.
15  
Appendix  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
770  
LEVELDEPEND  
THRESHOLD  
preset:8  
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.Setstheluminance  
rangeforedgeenhancement.  
.
.
.
[8]  
.
.
.
15  
771  
772  
H DETAIL  
FREQUENCYselect  
2.6 MHz  
3.4 MHz  
[3.9 MHz]  
4.6 MHz  
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.Setsthecenter  
frequencyforedgeenhancement.  
H/V RATIO  
preset:3  
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDDownconverter  
Board)isinstalled,adjuststheimageenhancer.Setsthe  
horizontaltoverticalratioforedgeenhancement.  
.
.
.
[3]  
.
.
.
7
773  
775  
GAMMALEVEL  
preset:0  
128  
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is  
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.Adjuststhegradient  
ofthecorrectioncurve.  
.
.
.
[0]  
.
.
.
128  
VIDEO OUTPUT DATA 8bit  
[10bit]  
Setsthebitsizeoftheoutputdatafromvideoprocessing  
(bitreductionprocessing).  
8bit:Whenconnectedtoan8-bitsystem  
10bit:Whenconnectedtoa10-bitsystem  
Notes  
Makesurethebitlengthmatchesthedestinationdevice.  
ThissettingisonlyactivewhentheHD-SDconverter  
outputissettoD1.  
776  
DOWNCONVERTER  
INPUT CHECK ENABLE  
[disable]  
SelectstheHD-SDconvertermodewhentheINPUT  
CHECKbuttononthecontrolpanelispressed.  
disable:TheINPUTCHECKbuttonisnotlinkedto  
downconverteroutput.  
enable  
enable:TheINPUTCHECKbuttonislinkedto  
downconverteroutput.WhentheINPUTCHECKbutton  
ispressed,theinputsignalselectedbythesettingin  
item701isoutputtotheHD-SDconverteroutput  
connector.  
Note  
TheINPUTCHECKbuttonworksforalloftheHD-SD  
converteroutputconnectors.  
777  
778  
V-FILTER SELECT  
[1]  
2
3
Selectscoefficientoftheverticalinterpolationfilterforthe  
HD-SDconverteroutput. Thehigherthefigureis,the  
highertheverticalresolutionis.  
LETTER BOX MODE  
[16:9]  
14:9  
13:9  
Whenitem754issettoLETTERBOX,thissetting  
specifiestheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutput.  
16:9:TheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutputis  
16:9.  
14:9:TheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutputis  
14:9.  
13:9:TheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutputis  
13:9.  
A-38  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Items Related to the Audio Control (801~)  
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
801  
802  
803  
AUDIO INPUT  
select  
ALL-CHANNELS  
analg  
[SDI]  
Selectsthetypeandchannelsoftheaudioinputsignals.  
analg:AudiosignalsinputtotheANALOGAUDIOINPUT  
connectors.  
SDI:AudiosignalsinputtotheHDSDIINPUTconnectors.  
AES/EBU:AudiosignalsinputtotheAUDIOINPUT(AES/  
EBU)connectors.  
[SDTI](OnlywhentheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoardis  
installed.):IfSDTIisselectedinitem701.,theSDTI  
audiosignalinputtotheSDTI(OPTION)INconnectoris  
automaticallyselectedandAUDIOINPUT/MONITOR  
SELECTbuttonsontheuppercontrolpanelbecome  
unlitandanotherinputselectioncannotbemade.  
AES/EBU  
[SDTI]  
AUDIO INPUT  
select  
CH-1  
analg  
[SDI]  
AES/EBU  
[SDTI]  
AUDIO INPUT  
select  
CH-2  
analg  
[SDI]  
AES/EBU  
[SDTI]  
analg  
[SDI]  
804  
805  
AUDIO INPUT  
select  
CH-3  
AES/EBU  
[SDTI]  
AUDIO INPUT  
select  
analg  
[SDI]  
CH-4  
AES/EBU  
[SDTI]  
806  
807  
808  
809  
AUDIO EMPHASIS [off]  
Selectstheemphasismodewhenrecordingdigitalaudio  
signalsconvertedfromanaloginputaudiosignals.  
off:Emphasisisnotappliedtoanyoftheaudiosignals.  
on:Emphasisisappliedtoalloftheaudiosignals.  
on  
AUDIO MONITOR- [ch1]  
SelectstheaudiochanneloutputfromtheAUDIO  
MONITOROUTPUTLconnector.  
Lselect  
ch2  
.
.
.
ch1,ch2,ch3,ch4,cue  
AUDIO MONITOR- ch1  
SelectstheaudiochanneloutputfromtheAUDIO  
MONITOROUTPUTRconnector.  
Rselect  
[ch2]  
.
.
.
ch1,ch2,ch3,ch4,cue  
DIGITALJOG  
SOUND  
off  
[on]  
Switchesdigitaljogsoundonandoff.  
off: Digitaljogsoundisswitchedoff.  
Inthiscase,thesoundforchannelsforwhichspeed  
correctionprocessingisnotbeingcarriedoutisoutput,  
eveninthecaseofSTILL.”  
on: Digitaljogsoundisswitchedon.  
811  
DIGITALAUDIO  
FADE TIME  
5ms  
[10 ms]  
Specifiesthefadeprocessingtimeduringcross-fadingor  
fading-in/outofdigitalaudiosignals.  
15ms  
20ms  
Note  
25msa)  
50msb)  
85ms  
Processingforcrossfading,fading-in,andfading-outstarts  
afteranINorOUTpoint. Thisitemspecifiesrewriting  
duringrecordingfollowingtheOUTpoint. Rewritingofone  
fieldoccursevenwhentheminimumsetting(5ms)is  
selected. Whencuteditisselectedinitem317toprevent  
thisfromhappening,adiscontinuityintheaudiosignal  
occurs.Thereis,however,noeffectontherecordingofthe  
videosignal.  
115 msc)  
a)Thecrossfadetimeis24ms.  
b)Theactualfadetimeis49ms.  
c)Theactualfadetimeis114ms.  
Appendix  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
812  
AUDIO CH3/4  
INPUT SOURCE  
ARRANGE  
[CH3/CH4 : sw/sw]  
CH3/CH4:ch1/sw  
CH3/CH4:sw/ch2  
CH3/CH4:ch1/ch2  
Selecttheinputsignalfordigitalaudiochannels3and4.  
CH3/CH4: sw/sw:Thesignalthatisselectedbytheupper  
controlpanelisinputtochannels3and4.  
CH3/CH4:ch1/sw:Thesignaltoberecordedinchannel1is  
alsorecordedinchannel3.  
CH3/CH4:sw/ch2:Thesignaltoberecordedinchannel2is  
alsorecordedinchannel4.  
CH3/CH4:ch1/ch2:Thesignaltoberecordedinchannel1  
isrecordedinchannel3whilethesignaltoberecorded  
inchannel2isrecordedinchannel4.  
Note  
Theeditpresetforchannels3and4iscompletely  
independent.EvenifthisitemissettoCH3/CH4 : sw/sw”  
andinserteditingisperformedwitheditpresetforchannel1  
only,nosignalisrecordedinchannel3.  
Therecordinglevelisdetermined,notbythesettingsfor  
channels3and4,butbythelevelcontroloftheinput  
channelsusedasthesourcewhenthissettingisCH3/  
CH4:ch1/sw,CH3/CH4:sw/ch2,orCH3/CH4:ch1/ch2.  
ThelevelcontrolforLINE/MONITORoutputisindependent  
ofE-E,CONFI,andPBmodesevenwhenthissettingis  
CH3/CH4:ch1/sw,CH3/CH4:sw/ch2,orCH3/CH4:ch1/ch2.  
813  
814  
815  
AUDIO MONITOR add  
Specifiesthetypeofaudiomixingtobeconductedonthe  
digitalaudiosignaloutputtotheMONITOROUTPUT  
connector.  
add:Simpleaddition  
rms:Multipliedaverage  
OUTPUT MIXING  
[rms]  
average  
average:Simpleaverage  
Note  
WhentheCUEchannelsignalisoutputtothemonitor,  
signalsaremixedbysimpleaddition.  
LEVEL METER  
SCALE  
[peak 0 dB]  
reference0dB  
Specifiesthemodeinwhichthedigitalaudiolevelis  
displayed.  
peak 0 dB:Displaysminusaudiolevelswiththemaximum  
levelset at 0dB.  
reference0dB:Displaysplusandminusaudiolevelswith  
thereferencelevelsetat0dB.  
Note  
Thecuechannellevelisalwaysdisplayedwiththereference  
levelset at 0dB.  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
PHASE  
0
Setstheoutputtimingforthedigitalaudioplaybacksignal  
(SDIandAES/EBUonly). The128settingspecifiesthe  
referenceposition.  
Asettinglowerthan128advancestheoutputtiming,anda  
settinghigherthan128delaystheoutputtiming.  
(128samples,orapprox.2.7ms,with1sample=approx.  
20µs)  
.
.
.
preset:128  
[128]  
.
.
.
255  
817  
819  
AUDIOLEVEL  
METER DIMMER  
CONTROL  
[0]  
Specifiesthebrightnessoftheaudiolevelmeter.  
0isthebrightestlevel.  
7isthedarkestlevel.  
.
.
.
7
NON AUDIO  
MODEselect  
[BURST DATA MODE]  
Specifiestheformatinwhichnon-audiodataisrecorded.  
CONTINUOUS DATA MODE BURSTDATAMODE:Selectthissettingforrecordingdata  
compressedinunitsofvideoframes(e.g.,DolbyE).  
CONTINUOUSDATAMODE:Selectthissettingfor  
recordingdatacompressedwithoutanyrelationshipto  
thevideoframes(e.g.,DolbyDigital(AC-3)).  
A-40  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
820 NON AUDIO  
Channelselect  
Settable range  
Function  
[off]  
Selectstheaudiosignalandthechannelstoberecordedas  
non-audiodata.  
off: Non-audiosignalsarenotrecorded.  
SDI CH12 (MODE1)  
SDI CH34 (MODE2)  
SDI all (MODE3)  
AES CH12 (MODE4)  
AES CH34 (MODE5)  
AES all (MODE6)  
SDI CH12/AES CH34  
(MODE7)  
SDI CH12 (MODE1): Channels 1 and 2 of the signal input  
fromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorarerecorded.  
SDI CH34 (MODE2): Channels 3 and 4 of the signal input  
fromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorarerecorded.  
SDIall(MODE3): Channels1to4ofthesignalinputfrom  
theHD/SDIINPUTconnectorarerecorded.  
AESCH12(MODE4): Channels1and2ofthesignalinput  
fromtheAUDIOINPUT(AES/EBU)connectorare  
recorded.  
SDI CH34/AES CH12  
(MODE8)  
AESCH34(MODE5): Channels3and4ofthesignalinput  
fromtheAUDIOINPUT(AES/EBU)connectorare  
recorded.  
AESall(MODE6): Channels1to4ofthesignalinputfrom  
theAUDIOINPUT(AES/EBU)connectorsarerecorded.  
SDI CH12/AES CH34 (MODE7): Channels 1 and 2 of the  
signalinputfromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorandthe  
channels3and4ofthesignalinputfromtheAUDIO  
INPUT(AES/EBU)connectorarerecorded.  
SDI CH34/AES CH12 (MODE8): Channels 3 and 4 of the  
signalinputfromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorandthe  
channels1and2ofthesignalinputfromtheAUDIO  
INPUT(AES/EBU)connectorarerecorded.  
821  
Specifieswhetherornotthephaseoftheaudiooutputsignal  
isshifted1frameaheadofthevideooutputsignal.  
off: Thephaseoftheaudiooutputsignalisnotshifted.  
on: Thephaseoftheaudiooutputsignalisshifted1frame  
aheadofthevideooutputsignal.Notethatthephaseis  
shiftedforallaudiochannels.  
AUDIOADVANCE [off]  
MODE  
on  
Note  
WheneditpresetissettoON,HDW-F500operates  
internallywithoffsetting.  
Appendix  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to Digital Processing (901~)  
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.  
Item number Item  
902 FREEZE MODE  
Settable range  
Function  
[field]  
field1  
field2  
frame1+2  
frame2+1  
Specifiesthefreeze(still-picture)modeandfreezetiming  
duringmanualfreezing(byREMOTE1(9P)orREMOTE2  
(50P)connectoronthecontrolpanel)orautomaticfreezing.  
field:Freezestheoddorevenfield,dependingonthetiming  
infreezemode.  
field1:Freezesthefirst(odd)field  
field2:Freezesthesecond(even)field  
frame1+2:Freezesthefirstandthesubsequentsecondfield  
frame2+1:Freezesthesecondfieldandthesubsequentfirst  
field  
Inthecaseoffreezinginplaybackmodesotherthannormal  
playback,thepictureisfrozeninframemodeonlywhen  
dynamictrackingisperformingaframeoperation.The  
pictureisfrozedinfieldmodewhendynamictrackingisnot  
operating.  
Thefrozedpicturedoesnotchangeevenifyouchangethis  
settingduringfreezemode.Thechangetothissetting  
becomeseffectivethenexttimetheVTRoutputsastill  
picture.  
Whenthestopfreezefunctionisenabled,regardlessofthe  
settingofthisitem,thepictureisfrozeninframemodeonly  
whendynamictrackingisperformingaframeoperation,oris  
frozedinfieldmodewhendynamictrackingisperforminga  
fieldoperationorwhenitisnotoperating.  
903  
FREEZE  
CONTROL FROM latch  
KEYPANEL  
[momentary]  
Determinesthefreezeoperationcontrolbybutton  
operations.  
momentary :Thepictureisfrozenonlywhilethebuttonis  
helddown  
latch :Thepictureisfrozenwhenthebuttonispressed,and  
remainsfrozenwhenthebuttonisreleased.  
Thefozenpictureiscancelledwhenthebuttonis  
pressedagain.  
Buttonoperations  
Freezinginoddoreven(firstorsecond)fieldisspecified  
byitem902. Distinctionbetweenthefirstorsecondfield,  
followsthedistinctioninthereferencesignal.  
A-42  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
905 STOP FREEZE  
CONTROL  
Settable range  
Function  
disable  
[enable]  
Enableordisablesthestopfreezefunction.  
Stop freeze opration  
MODE(After)  
STDBY OFF  
DTpicture  
TENSION OFF  
STOP  
MODE(Before)  
STILL  
DTpicture  
DTpicture  
(dynamictrackingon)  
CAPSTANdrive  
(includesshuttlingupto ×10  
normaltapespeed)  
non-DTpicture  
non-DTpicture  
non-DTpicture  
non-DTpicture  
Reeldrive  
(includesshuttlingover ×10  
normaltapespeed)  
non-DTpicture  
non-DTpicture  
A DT pictureis a frozen picture in noiseless DT playback mode. The picture freezes in frame mode when the dynamic  
tracking is performing a frame operation. It freezes in field mode when dynamic tracking is not performing a frame  
operation.  
A non-DT pictureis a frozen picture in shuttle mode. A block pattern may appear in a non-DT picture, depending on the  
circumstances.  
Appendix  
A-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Items Related to the Pull Down Control (A01~)  
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
A01  
A02  
A03  
PD TIME CODE  
DISPLAY  
[off]  
Setswhetherornottodisplaythepulldowntimecodeon  
thetimecodedisplayarea.  
off:Doesnotdisplaythepulldowntimecode.  
on:Displaysthepulldowntimecode.  
on  
PD PRESET  
FRAME MODE  
[24 FRAME MODE]  
30 FRAME MODE  
Selectsthetimecodetobepreset. TheAframeofthe  
pulldownsequencecanbepreset.  
24FRAMEMODE:The24framestimecodeispreset.  
30FRAMEMODE:The30framestimecodeispreset.  
PD  
[off]  
Specifieswhetherornottosuperimposetimedataand  
operatingstatusinformationonthesignaloutputfromthe  
PULLDOWNOUTconnector.  
SUPERIMPOSED  
CHARACTER  
on  
off:Noinformationissuperimposed.  
on:Informationissuperimposed.  
[drop frame]  
non-dropframe  
auto  
Selectstherunningmodeforthepulldowntimecodetobe  
preset.  
dropframe:Dropframemode  
PD DF/NDF  
SELECT  
A04  
non-dropframe:Non-dropframemode  
auto:Theunitswitchestherunningmode(DF/NDF)  
automaticallyaccordingtotheframefrequencyofthe  
unit. Whentheframefrequencyis23.976Hz,theunit  
switchestothedropframemodeandswitchestothe  
non-dropframemodewhenitis24Hz.  
A05  
[off]  
lock1  
lock2  
PD EXT SD REF  
LOCK MODE  
WhenanHKDV-507D(optionalHDPullDownBoard)is  
installedandtheoperatingfrequencyissetto23.976PsF,  
specifieswhetherornotthepulldownoutputsignaland  
down-convertedoutputsignalaresynchronizedwith  
externalSD(EXT-SD)referencesignal. Tooutputthepull  
downsignal,anHKDV-507D(optionalHDPullDownBoard)  
mustbeinstalled. Tooutputthedown-convertedsignal,an  
HKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)mustbe  
installed.  
off:Thepulldownoutputsignalanddown-convertedoutput  
signalarenotsynchronizedwithexternalSD(EXT-SD)  
referencesignal.  
lock1:Thepulldownoutputsignalanddown-converted  
outputsignalaresynchronizedwithexternalSD(EXT-  
SD)referencesignal.  
lock2:Thepulldownoutputsignalanddown-converted  
outputsignalaresynchronizedwithexternalSD(EXT-  
SD)referencesignal. WhenthePB/EEmodeis  
selected,theamountofdelayontheAframeofthepull  
downoutputsignalfortheAframeofthemainvideo  
signalisfixedto2frames(59.94i).  
Note  
AwarningmessageappearswhentheHDreference  
signalandexternalSD(EX-SD)referencesignalarenot  
inputortheHDreferencesignalandexternalSDreference  
signalarenotsynchronized.  
lock1andlock2areeffectiveonlywhentheoperation  
modeofthisunitissetto23.98PsF.  
A-44  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
A06  
PD  
[off]  
Whenitem620andA03issettoon,specifieswhetheror  
nottheID(24F/30F)isdisplayedtotherightof  
superimposedtimecode.  
SUPERIMPOSED  
TIME CODE ID  
on  
off: NoIDisdisplayed.  
on: ID(24For30F)isdisplayed.  
Note  
Thesettingofthisitemiseffectiveonlywhentheoperation  
modeofthisunitissetto23.98PsFor24PsF.  
[off]  
A07  
PD CHARACTER  
24F TIME CODE  
MODE  
Whenitem620andA03issettoon,specifieswhetheror  
notthe2-3pulldown24-frametimedataisinsertedtothe  
firstlineinsteadof30-frametimedata.  
on  
off: 30-frametimedataisdisplayed.  
on: 24-frametimedataisdisplayed.  
Note  
Thesettingofthisitemiseffectiveonlywhentheoperation  
modeofthisunitissetto23.98PsFor24PsF.  
[24F]  
30F  
WhenanHKDV-507D(optionalHDPullDownBoard)is  
installedandtheoperatingfrequencyissetto23.976PsF,  
specifieswhetherornotthe30-frame/sectimecode  
informationofpulldownoutputsignalanddown-converted  
outputsignalisreturnedwhentimecodesensecommand  
isinputthroughthe9-pinconnector.  
A10  
TCsensedata  
select  
24F: 24-frame/sectimecodeinformationofmainoutput  
signalisreturned.  
30F: 30-frame/sectimecodeinformationofpulldown  
outputsignalanddown-convertedoutputsignalis  
returned.  
Notes  
Pulldownoutputsignaland30-frame/sectimecodeare  
synchronizedonlywhenthisunitissettoPLAYLOCK  
mode. Tosynchronizethesignals,setitemA05.PDEXT  
SDREFLOCKMODEtolock2.”  
Machine-to-machineeditingusingthepulldownoutput  
signalwithaVTRoperatingin30Fmodemaynotfunction  
properlyiftheVTRin30Fmodeisengagedinplayersync.  
Appendix  
A-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Other Items (T01~)  
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.  
Item number Item  
Settable range  
Function  
T01  
AUTO REPEAT  
MODE  
[off]  
Selectstherepeatingoperationinautomaticediting.  
off:Automaticeditingisnotrepeated.  
on:Automaticeditingisrepeated.Tostop,presstheSTOP  
button.  
on  
T02  
INTERNAL VIDEO [off]  
Selectsthetestsignaloutputbythesignalgeneratorbuilt  
intotheVTR.  
off:Thetestsignalisnotgenerated,andtheVTRoperates  
normally.  
allothersettings:ThetestsignalisoutputfromtheVTR.At  
thistimeitisalsopossibletorecordthesignal.  
SIGNAL  
GENERATOR (HD)  
COLORBARS  
MULTIBURST  
10 STEPS  
PULSE & BAR  
[RAMP]  
BLACK  
T03  
INTERNAL VIDEO 1035  
Selectstheeffectivescanninglinenumberofthetestsignal  
outputbythesignalgeneratorbuiltintotheVTR.  
1035:Setstheeffectivescanninglinenumberto1035.  
1080:Setstheeffectivescanninglinenumberto1080.  
SIGNALLINE  
SELECT  
[1080]  
Note  
Thissettingisonlyactivewhentheframefrequencyofthe  
unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.  
T04  
INTERNALAUDIO [off]  
Selectstheoperationofaudiotestsignaloutput.  
off:Theaudiotestsignalisnotoutput.  
silence:Mutesignal.  
SIGNAL  
GENERATOR  
silence  
1kHzsine  
1 kHz sine: 1 kHz (In this case, a 1 kHz -20 dB FS sine  
waveissuppliedtoallaudioinputs.)  
Note  
Whensilenceor1kHzsineisselected,theAUDIO  
INPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttonslightup.  
When the unit is operated i n the 23.98 PsF or 24 PsF  
modewith1kHzsineselected,theoutputsignalis960  
Hz.  
Note  
Items T01, T02, and T04 are reset whenever the power is turned off. Item T03 is maintained even when the power  
is turned off.  
A-46  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
C
D
AC IN connector 2-15  
ACCESS button 2-6  
Capstan override playback 5-14  
Cassettes  
D CONV. OUT (OPTION) SYNC  
connector 2-15  
Adjusting  
handling cassettes 3-8  
inserting and ejecting cassettes 3-8  
preventing accidental erasure 3-9  
recommended cassettes 3-8  
Changing  
D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE  
(SUPER) connector 2-15  
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)  
connectors 2-16  
Deleting edit points 6-10  
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button 2-2  
Displaying the duration 6-8  
DMC editing  
overview 6-15  
performing 6-15  
setting edit points and playback speed  
6-15  
DMC playback  
audio playback level 5-6  
output video signal 4-58  
recording level 5-3  
ALARM indicator 2-6  
ALT button 2-6  
Assemble editing 4-17, 6-3  
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons 2-8  
AUDIO INPUT connectors 2-16  
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)  
connectors 2-15  
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600termination  
switches 2-16  
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT  
buttons 2-4  
Audio level meters 2-3  
AUDIO OUTPUT connectors 2-16  
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)  
connectors 2-15  
AUTO button 2-8  
Automatic edit modes 6-1  
Automatic editing  
Animation editing 6-17  
Backspace editing 4-40  
confirming edit points 6-8  
cuing up and prerolling 6-8  
DMC editing 6-15  
modifying edit points 6-10, 6-13  
non-audio data 6-7  
overview of automatic editing 6-1  
performing editing 6-12, 6-14  
preread editing 6-18  
previewing 6-9  
selecting the edit mode 6-3  
setting edit points 6-3  
menu settings 4-2  
preroll time 6-9  
Confirming edit points 6-8  
Connecting external equipment  
Cascade connection 3-4  
making HD analog connections 3-2  
making digital connections 3-1  
making NTSC/PAL Digital Connections  
3-3  
Connector panel 2-14  
Control panel  
lower control panel  
(editing operations section) 2-7  
lower control panel  
(menu operations section) 2-5  
lower control panel  
(search operations section) 2-11  
lower control panel  
(tape transport section) 2-9  
upper control panel 2-2  
CONTROL PANEL connector 2-16  
CONTROL PANEL switch 2-13  
Conversion  
selecting conversion mode 5-7, 5-8  
time code in 24F mode 4-34  
time code in 25F mode 4-29  
(HD-SD) conversion mode  
Edge crop 5-7  
Letter box mode 5-7  
Squeeze mode 5-7  
Cross-fade editing A-25  
CTL timer 4-24  
CUE menu 4-35  
Cue point  
overview 5-14  
performing 5-15  
DF (Drop frame) mode 4-25, 4-26  
E
Editing See Automatic editing  
Edit point  
confirming 6-8  
deleting 6-10  
modifying 6-10  
moving a position by one frame at a  
time 6-11  
setting 6-3  
recalling 4-19  
Editing precautions 6-1  
Effective scanning line number 5-8  
EJECT button 2-9  
Ejecting the cassette 3-8  
EMPHASIS 4-60  
ENTRY button 2-8  
Error Messages A-8  
Error Log Menu A-11  
Clearing warning messages A-12  
Adjusting the clock A-12  
EXTEND mode 4-36  
setting switches and menus 6-2  
steps in automatic editing 6-1  
B
changing into an edit point 4-40  
erasing 4-38  
prerolling 4-39  
Backspace editing 4-40  
BREAKER button 2-15  
F, G  
Fade IN/OUT A-26  
Function buttons 2-6  
registrating 4-36  
Cut editing A-26  
H
HD SDI INPUT connectors 2-15  
HD SDI OUTPUT connectors 2-15  
Head cleaning A-1  
HOME menu 4-14  
Index  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
I
O
R
IN/OUT buttons 2-8  
Indicator window 2-3  
INPUT CHECK button 2-8  
INPUT SELECT button 2-4  
Improving vertical resolution 5-9  
Insert editing 4-17, 6-3  
Inserting VITC 4-26  
Operation information A-6  
Outputting still-pictures 4-17  
Overview  
REC/EDIT button 2-10  
REC INHIBIT indicator 2-10  
REC level controls 2-3  
Recording 5-5  
automatic editing 6-1  
DMC editing 6-15  
DMC playback 5-13  
inhibit mode 4-16  
REF SYNC indicators 2-4  
Reference signals connections 3-6  
Reference signals for video output and  
servo system 3-5  
REF. IN SD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω  
termination switch 2-15  
REF. IN HD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω  
termination switch 2-15  
REF. OUT 1125 SYNC connectors 2-15  
REMOTE buttons 2-4  
P, Q  
J, K, L  
JOG button 2-11  
Jog mode playback 5-12  
PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector 2-16  
Pausing the current time 4-24  
PB audio output level controls 2-3  
PF1 menu 4-55  
PF2 menu 4-59  
PHONES jack 2-2  
PHONES level control 2-3  
PLAY button 2-10  
Playback 5-11  
capstan override playback 5-14  
DMC playback 5-14  
jog mode playback 5-12  
non-audio data 5-16  
normal-speed playback 5-11  
shuttle mode playback 5-12  
variable mode playback 5-13  
PLAYER/RECORDER buttons 2-8  
POWER switch 2-2  
Preparing for playback 5-6  
adjusting the audio playback level 5-6  
improving the vertical resolution 5-9  
selecting the HD-SD conversion mode 5-7  
Selecting the conversion mode of the  
effective scanning line number 5-8  
setting switches and menus 5-6  
Preparing for recording 5-1  
adjusting the audio recording level 5-3  
monitoring simultaneous playback of  
recording analog audio 5-4  
selecting audio signals 5-2  
setting switches and menus 5-1  
PREREAD indicator 2-8  
Preread editing 4-17  
M
MAINTENANCE A-1  
MAINTENANCE switch 2-6  
Manual editing 6-19  
Memory card  
REMOTE1-IN/OUT connectors 2-16  
RS-232C connector 2-16  
RS-232C indicator 2-4  
adding titles 4-11  
data compatibility 4-13  
formatting 4-6  
insertion slot 2-6  
recalling 4-9  
S
SDTI (OPTION) IN connector 2-15  
SDTI (OPTION) OUT connector 2-15  
Search dial 2-12  
recalling cue point list 4-10  
storing 4-7  
Selecting  
audio input signals 5-2  
audio signals to be monitored 5-2  
capstan servo lock mode 4-18  
CTL display 4-21  
CTL display mode 4-26  
conversion mode of the effective  
scanning line number 5-8  
drop frame mode 4-25  
edit mode 4-17  
HD-SD conversion mode 5-7  
input video signal 4-56  
monitor output signal 4-60  
multi-cue mode 4-36  
non-audio data as the audio input signal 5-3  
output signals 4-16  
output signals for the TIME CODE  
OUT terminal 4-17  
reference signal 4-56  
remote operation mode 4-62  
time code and user bits to be recorded 4-22  
SERVO indicator 2-10  
SET button 2-8  
storing cue point lists 4-8  
MEMORY CARD indicator 2-6  
Memory label 1-2, 4-41, A-5  
Menu  
configuration 4-1  
changing settings 4-2  
CUE menu 4-35  
HOME menu 4-14  
list A-15  
PANEL SETUP menu 4-65  
PF1 menu 4-55  
PF2 menu 4-59  
registering items to the PF1/2 menus 4-3  
MLB-1B-100 1-2, 4-41, A-5  
Moisture condensation A-1  
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors 2-16  
MONITOR SELECT button 2-3  
Monitoring video and audio signals being  
recorded 5-4  
PREROLL button 2-10  
Preroll time setting 4-18  
PREVIEW/REVIEW button 2-10  
Pull down output 5-16  
Pull down time code  
Displaying 4-29  
N
NDF (Non-drop frame) mode 4-25, 4-26  
Non-audio data  
SET UP menu 4-59  
SFT button 2-8  
Presetting 4-26  
editing 6-7  
playing back 5-16  
SHUTTLE button 2-11  
Shuttle mode playback 5-12  
Slow-motion playback  
improving vertical resolution 5-9  
Split editing 6-5  
selecting as the audio input signal 5-3  
Normal-speed playback 5-11  
STANDBY button 2-9  
STOP button 2-10  
Super imposition of character information 4-28  
System set-up panel 2-13  
I-2  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
TC menu 4-20  
Tele-File 1-2, 4-41  
TELE FILE menu 4-41  
Time code  
conversion in the 24F mode 4-34  
conversion in the 25F mode 4-29  
presetting for conversion from 24-frame  
to 25-frame time code 4-27  
presetting for conversion from 25-frame  
to 24-frame time code 4-33  
running mode 4-25  
Time code generator (TCG) 4-25  
setting 4-25  
TIME CODE IN connector 2-17  
TIME CODE OUT connector 2-17  
Time code reader (TCR) 4-24  
Time data  
resetting 4-24  
selecting the time data display 4-21  
setting 4-21  
U
Upper control panel 2-2  
User bits setting 4-24  
V
VAR button 2-11  
Variable mode playback 5-13  
Vertical resolution 5-9  
VIDEO CONTROL connector 2-16  
VITC insertion line setting 4-32  
VTR memory banks 4-4  
adding titles 4-11  
recalling 4-5  
storing 4-4  
VTR SETUP menu  
items related to digital processing A-42  
items related to editing A-24  
items related to operation panels A-20  
items related to prerolling A-27  
items related to recording protection A-28  
items related to remote interface A-23  
items related to the audio control A-39  
items related to the hours meter A-15  
items related to the pull down control A-44  
items related to the time code A-29  
items related to the video control A-34  
items related to VTR operations A-16  
other items A-46  
W, X, Y, Z  
Warning messages A-10  
Index  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The material contained in this manual consists of  
information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is  
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment  
described in this manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose  
other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment  
described in this manual without the express written  
permission of Sony Corporation.  
Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en  
informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation et  
sont destinées exclusivement à lusage des acquéreurs de  
l’équipement décrit dans ce manuel.  
Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de quelque  
partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi pour tout  
autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de l’équipement  
à moins dune permission écrite de Sony Corporation.  
Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus  
Informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind,  
und ausschließlich zum Gebrauch durch den Käufer der in  
dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausrüstung bestimmt sind.  
Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdrücklich die  
Vervielfältigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den  
Gebrauch derselben für irgendeinen anderen Zweck als die  
Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung  
beschriebenen Ausrüstung ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche  
Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sony Corporation  
Printed in Japan  
2001.09.13  
1999  
Broadband Solutions Network Company  
HDW-F500 (SYL,  
)
3-203-128-04(1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Shark Vacuum Cleaner EP035 User Manual
Sharp Air Conditioner AE X09LCJ User Manual
Sony Cordless Telephone PP A2780 User Manual
Sony Microphone ECM MS957 User Manual
Sony MiniDisc Player MDS S41 User Manual
Soundstream Technologies Stereo Amplifier MC 300 User Manual
Speed Queen Clothes Dryer HE6434 User Manual
SUPER MICRO Computer Life Jacket 6025B 3 User Manual
Sylvania VCR KVS600A User Manual
Targus Camera Accessories TGRSD20 User Manual